FDMSRcDebit Class
Properties Methods Events Config Settings Errors
The FDMSRcDebit class is an advanced tool used to authorize debit cards in a Retail environment, where the customer is purchasing products or services in person. This class makes authorizing debit card transactions with a customer PIN very easy.
Syntax
class dpaymentssdk.FDMSRcDebit
Remarks
This class connects to the First Data Merchant Services (FDMS) processor, by way of the Datawire VXN transaction transport network. Transactions originating with these classs go through Datawire, to the FDMS processor where the transaction is authorized. The result is then returned back through Datawire and received by the class. This class can be integrated into web pages or stand-alone Point Of Sale applications. Because all SSL communications are handled inside the class, any application or web page can be deployed without the need for expensive dedicated SSL servers.
The FDMSRcDebit class makes authorizing debit transactions (where the customer is present and inputs his/her PIN number) very easy by adding an additional layer of abstraction between the programmer and the protocol. There is no need to deal with raw sockets, TLS/SSL handshakes, or data packet formatting. The steps to setting up the class and sending transactions are outlined below:
Datawire Setup
First, you must register and activate your account with Datawire. FDMS Rapid Connect will provide you with the following values:
The FDMSRegister class must be used to activate the merchant and receive a datawire_id. Once you acquire the datawire_id and receive your transaction URLs through service_discovery, you may begin to authorize transactions. For instance:
FDMSRegister.FDMSPlatform = FdmsregisterFDMSPlatforms.fpRapidConnect;
FDMSRegister.MerchantNumber = "000000999990";
FDMSRegister.MerchantTerminalNumber = "555555";
FDMSRegister.Config("GroupId=20001"); //Required for Rapid Connect
FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = "1"; //any unique number will do.
FDMSRegister.URL = "https://stagingsupport.datawire.net/staging_expresso/SRS.do";
FDMSRegister.Register();
FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber + 1;
FDMSRegister.Activate();
FDMSRegister.ServiceDiscovery(FDMSRegister.PrimaryDiscoveryURL);
for (int i = 0; i < FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders.Length; i++) {
FDMSRegister.Ping(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i]);
Console.WriteLine(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i] + " = " + FDMSRegister.PingResponseTime);
}
To authorize a credit, debit, ebt or FSA/HSA card set the merchant_id, merchant_terminal_number, and group_id properties with the values supplied by FDMS Rapid Connect. Set the datawire_id property with the value retrieved by the FDMSRegister class after activating your merchant account. Set the url property with one of the URLs you retrieved during service_discovery.
Transaction Processing
To begin processing transactions first set the required merchant values. For instance:
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
Next specify transaction specific information. These values uniquely identify the transaction to Datawire and FDMS.
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
Then specify customer card and address information along with the transaction amount:
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200"; //$12.00
Finally, submit the transaction by calling the sale method.
debit.Sale();
The response_code property indicates the result of the transaction. A code of 000 indicates success. For all other values please see the Response Codes section. Additional Response properties such as response_approval_code, response_authorized_amount, response_text, response_avs_result, response_cvv_result, and more, provide further details about the transaction response.
To perform subsequent operations on a transaction, such as calling reverse to reverse a sale, or calling capture to capture a previous auth_only transaction the get_detail_aggregate method must be used to get details about the original transaction. This aggregate must be stored securely, it will contain cardholder information that is required for subsequent transactions. For instance:
debit.Sale();
//Save the detail aggregate to use with Reverse
string aggregate = debit.GetDetailAggregate();
//The aggregate must then be stored securely.
//At a later time the aggregate is retrieved in order to perform a reversal.
//Reverse
debit = new Fdmsrcdebit();
...
//Specify the detail aggregate from the original transaction
debit.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate);
debit.ReversalTransactionType = FdmsrcdebitReversalTransactionTypes.frttSale;
debit.ReversalType = FdmsrcdebitReversalTypes.fdrtFullReversal;
debit.Reverse();
Transaction Types
In addition to a basic sale transaction, additional transaction types exist for other common operations. Not all transaction types are applicable for all classs. Check the method list for applicable transaction types.
auth_only | An authorization that must be captured later. |
balance_inquiry | Inquire about available balance. |
capture | Captures a previous auth_only transaction for settlement. |
credit | Credits funds to the cardholder. This is not based on a previous transaction. |
reverse | Reverse a previous transaction. This is also used for timeout reversals. |
sale | A basic sale, no other steps are required to complete the payment. |
verify_card | Verifies that a card is valid. |
host_totals | Requests a Host Totals Report for a particular day. |
voucher_clear | Performs an online force-post entry of a voice-authorized Food Benefit or eWIC transaction. |
Note: FDMS Rapid Connect is a host capture system. No explicit calls are needed to settle or otherwise manage the batch.
Property List
The following is the full list of the properties of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
application_id | Identifies the merchant application to the Datawire System. |
installment_description | The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction. |
installment_invoice_number | The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction. |
installment_type | The type of the Installment payment. |
merchant_advice_code | This property contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction. |
mit_amount | The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment. |
mit_amount_type | Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount. |
mit_frequency | This property indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment. |
mit_payment_currency | Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value. |
mit_recurring_payment_type | This property contains the type of Recurring Payment. |
mit_registration_ref_num | This property contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction. |
mit_sequence_indicator | Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted. |
mit_total_payment_amount | This property contains the Total Installment Amount. |
mit_total_payment_count | The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant. |
mit_unique_id | This property is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment. |
mit_validation_flag | Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction. |
mit_validation_ref | This property contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction. |
transaction_indicator | Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made. |
card_type | Type of credit card being used in this transaction. |
card_cvv_data | Three digit security code on back of card (optional). |
card_cvv_presence | Indicates the presence of the card verification value. |
card_entry_data_source | This property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data. |
card_exp_month | Expiration month of the credit card specified in Number . |
card_exp_year | Expiration year of the credit card specified in Number . |
card_is_encrypted | Determines whether data set to the Number or MagneticStripe properties is validated. |
card_magnetic_stripe | Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe. |
card_number | Customer's credit card number for the transaction. |
cash_back | Optional cash back amount to return to the customer. |
datawire_id | Identifies the merchant to the Datawire System. |
emv_data | The EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card. |
encrypted_pin | DUKPT DES encrypted pin block, retrieved from a PIN pad. |
group_id | The Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants. |
industry_type | The merchant's industry type. |
ksn | Clear-text Key Sequence Number retrieved from a PIN pad. |
merchant_id | A unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems. |
merchant_terminal_number | Used to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location. |
order_number | A merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction. |
proxy_auth_scheme | The type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy. |
proxy_auto_detect | Whether to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available. |
proxy_password | A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
proxy_port | The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy Server (default 80). |
proxy_server | If a proxy Server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified. |
proxy_ssl | When to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy. |
proxy_user | A username if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
reference_number | A value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions. |
response_approval_code | The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization. |
response_authorized_amount | The amount actually charged to the card. |
response_authorizing_network_id | This property indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available. |
response_authorizing_network_name | This property indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available. |
response_avs_result | Contains the Address Verification System result code. |
response_balance | Contains the remaining available balance left on the card. |
response_card_level_result | This property is only applicable to Visa card. |
response_code | Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure. |
response_commercial_card | Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card. |
response_cvv_result | Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request). |
response_datawire_return_code | Contains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received. |
response_datawire_status | Status of the communication with Datawire. |
response_emv_data | Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any). |
response_pos_data | This property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any). |
response_returned_aci | Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status. |
response_routing_indicator | Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit. |
response_settlement_date | The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD. |
response_text | This property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the property in error, etc. |
response_transaction_date | The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format. |
response_transaction_id | Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number. |
reversal_transaction_type | The type of transaction to reverse. |
reversal_type | The type of reversal. |
settlement_mode | Indicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_effective_date | The date on which this certificate becomes valid. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_expiration_date | The date on which the certificate expires. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_extended_key_usage | A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint | The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 | The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 | The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_issuer | The issuer of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key | The private key of the certificate (if available). |
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_available | Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_container | The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available). |
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key | The public key of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_algorithm | The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_length | The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). |
ssl_accept_server_cert_serial_number | The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_signature_algorithm | The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_store | The name of the certificate store for the client certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password | If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type | The type of certificate store for this certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject_alt_names | Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 | The MD5 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 | The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 | The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage | The text description of UsageFlags . |
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage_flags | The flags that show intended use for the certificate. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_version | The certificate's version number. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject | The subject of the certificate used for client authentication. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded | The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). |
ssl_cert_effective_date | The date on which this certificate becomes valid. |
ssl_cert_expiration_date | The date on which the certificate expires. |
ssl_cert_extended_key_usage | A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. |
ssl_cert_fingerprint | The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha1 | The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha256 | The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_issuer | The issuer of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_private_key | The private key of the certificate (if available). |
ssl_cert_private_key_available | Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate. |
ssl_cert_private_key_container | The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available). |
ssl_cert_public_key | The public key of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_public_key_algorithm | The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. |
ssl_cert_public_key_length | The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). |
ssl_cert_serial_number | The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. |
ssl_cert_signature_algorithm | The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. |
ssl_cert_store | The name of the certificate store for the client certificate. |
ssl_cert_store_password | If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store. |
ssl_cert_store_type | The type of certificate store for this certificate. |
ssl_cert_subject_alt_names | Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate. |
ssl_cert_thumbprint_md5 | The MD5 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha1 | The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha256 | The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_cert_usage | The text description of UsageFlags . |
ssl_cert_usage_flags | The flags that show intended use for the certificate. |
ssl_cert_version | The certificate's version number. |
ssl_cert_subject | The subject of the certificate used for client authentication. |
ssl_cert_encoded | The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). |
ssl_provider | The Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) implementation to use. |
ssl_server_cert_effective_date | The date on which this certificate becomes valid. |
ssl_server_cert_expiration_date | The date on which the certificate expires. |
ssl_server_cert_extended_key_usage | A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. |
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint | The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 | The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 | The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_issuer | The issuer of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_private_key | The private key of the certificate (if available). |
ssl_server_cert_private_key_available | Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_private_key_container | The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available). |
ssl_server_cert_public_key | The public key of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_public_key_algorithm | The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. |
ssl_server_cert_public_key_length | The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). |
ssl_server_cert_serial_number | The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. |
ssl_server_cert_signature_algorithm | The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. |
ssl_server_cert_store | The name of the certificate store for the client certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_store_password | If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store. |
ssl_server_cert_store_type | The type of certificate store for this certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_subject_alt_names | Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 | The MD5 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 | The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 | The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_usage | The text description of UsageFlags . |
ssl_server_cert_usage_flags | The flags that show intended use for the certificate. |
ssl_server_cert_version | The certificate's version number. |
ssl_server_cert_subject | The subject of the certificate used for client authentication. |
ssl_server_cert_encoded | The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). |
stan | The merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN). |
timeout | A timeout for the class. |
tppid | Third Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS. |
transaction_amount | The transaction amount to be authorized. |
transaction_number | Uniquely identifies the transaction. |
url | Location of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent. |
visa_identifier | Additional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions. |
Method List
The following is the full list of the methods of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
balance_inquiry | Performs a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data. |
config | Sets or retrieves a configuration setting. |
credit | Submits a credit transaction. |
get_detail_aggregate | Returns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode. |
host_totals | Performs a Host Totals request. |
interrupt | Interrupts the current action. |
reset | Clears all properties to their default values. |
reverse | Reverses a transaction. |
sale | Performs a sale transaction. |
set_detail_aggregate | Specifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse. |
Event List
The following is the full list of the events fired by the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
on_connected | Fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails). |
on_data_packet_in | Fired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server. |
on_data_packet_out | Fired when sending a data packet to the transaction server. |
on_disconnected | Fired when a connection is closed. |
on_error | Fired when information is available about errors during data delivery. |
on_ssl_server_authentication | Fired after the server presents its certificate to the client. |
on_ssl_status | Fired when secure connection progress messages are available. |
on_status | Shows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection. |
Config Settings
The following is a list of config settings for the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.
AllowPartialAuths | Indicates whether partial authorizations are supported. |
AltMerchantAddress | The alternative merchant address. |
AltMerchantCity | The alternative merchant city. |
AltMerchantCountryCode | The alternative merchant country code. |
AltMerchantEmail | The alternative merchant email. |
AltMerchantName | The alternative merchant name. |
AltMerchantState | The alternative merchant state. |
AltMerchantZip | The alternative merchant zip code. |
AuthIndicator | Indicate the type of authorization requested. |
AuthorizationIndicator | Indicates whether the authorization is a final authorization. |
AuthSource | Indicates the source of the decision for the Visa transaction. |
CardInputMode | The method used to input the card details. |
CardType | Specifies the type of card. |
ClientTimeout | Indicates timeout client application will wait for response. |
CurrencyCode | Currency Code for this transaction. |
DebugTrace | Whether to enable debug logging. |
DeviceTypeIndicator | Defines the form factor used at the POS for MasterCard PayPass transactions. |
GetTransArmorToken | Allows you to retrieve a TransArmor Token for a specified card. |
HostTotalsPassword | The merchant password required in Host Totals requests. |
HostTotalsType | Indicates the Host Totals Report type requested. |
IsDeferredAuth | Indicates whether the transaction is a Deferred Authorization. |
IsOnlineRefund | Indicates whether a transaction is Online Refund Authorization. |
LocalTransactionDate | The local date of the transaction. |
MerchantCategoryCode | The 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC). |
PayeeAcctNum | The Account Number of the Payee (Biller). |
PayeeId | The Payee Id. |
PayeePhoneNum | The Phone Number of the Payee (Biller). |
POSConditionCode | The POS condition code. |
POSId | Identifies the specific point of sale device. |
TerminalCardCapability | The terminal's card capture capability. |
TerminalEntryCapability | The terminal's entry mode capability. |
TerminalLocationIndicator | The terminal's location. |
TerminalPinCapability | The terminal's PIN capability. |
TerminalTaxCapability | The terminal's ability to prompt for tax. |
TotalAuthorizedAmount | Total Authorized Amount. |
TransArmorKey | Specifies the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption. |
TransArmorKeyId | Specifies the Id of the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption. |
TransArmorMode | Specifies the TransArmor Security Level to use. |
TransArmorProviderId | The Id of the Provider that issued a TransArmorToken. |
TransArmorToken | A TransArmor Token used in place of a card number or magnetic stripe data. |
TransArmorTokenType | The FDMS assigned token type. |
TransArmorTokenType | Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used. |
TransArmorUpdateIndicator | Indicates whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated. |
UpdateTransArmorKey | Allows you to update your TransArmor Key. |
UTCTransactionDate | The UTC date of the transaction. |
VoiceApprovalCode | The voice approval. |
AcceptEncoding | Used to tell the server which types of content encodings the client supports. |
AllowHTTPCompression | This property enables HTTP compression for receiving data. |
AllowHTTPFallback | Whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fallback to HTTP/1.1. |
Append | Whether to append data to LocalFile. |
Authorization | The Authorization string to be sent to the server. |
BytesTransferred | Contains the number of bytes transferred in the response data. |
ChunkSize | Specifies the chunk size in bytes when using chunked encoding. |
CompressHTTPRequest | Set to true to compress the body of a PUT or POST request. |
EncodeURL | If set to True the URL will be encoded by the class. |
FollowRedirects | Determines what happens when the server issues a redirect. |
GetOn302Redirect | If set to True the class will perform a GET on the new location. |
HTTP2HeadersWithoutIndexing | HTTP2 headers that should not update the dynamic header table with incremental indexing. |
HTTPVersion | The version of HTTP used by the class. |
IfModifiedSince | A date determining the maximum age of the desired document. |
KeepAlive | Determines whether the HTTP connection is closed after completion of the request. |
KerberosSPN | The Service Principal Name for the Kerberos Domain Controller. |
LogLevel | The level of detail that is logged. |
MaxRedirectAttempts | Limits the number of redirects that are followed in a request. |
NegotiatedHTTPVersion | The negotiated HTTP version. |
OtherHeaders | Other headers as determined by the user (optional). |
ProxyAuthorization | The authorization string to be sent to the proxy server. |
ProxyAuthScheme | The authorization scheme to be used for the proxy. |
ProxyPassword | A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
ProxyPort | Port for the proxy server (default 80). |
ProxyServer | Name or IP address of a proxy server (optional). |
ProxyUser | A user name if authentication is to be used for the proxy. |
SentHeaders | The full set of headers as sent by the client. |
StatusCode | The status code of the last response from the server. |
StatusLine | The first line of the last response from the server. |
TransferredData | The contents of the last response from the server. |
TransferredDataLimit | The maximum number of incoming bytes to be stored by the class. |
TransferredHeaders | The full set of headers as received from the server. |
TransferredRequest | The full request as sent by the client. |
UseChunkedEncoding | Enables or Disables HTTP chunked encoding for transfers. |
UseIDNs | Whether to encode hostnames to internationalized domain names. |
UsePlatformHTTPClient | Whether or not to use the platform HTTP client. |
UseProxyAutoConfigURL | Whether to use a Proxy auto-config file when attempting a connection. |
UserAgent | Information about the user agent (browser). |
ConnectionTimeout | Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection. |
ConnectionTimeout | Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection. |
FirewallAutoDetect | Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available. |
FirewallAutoDetect | Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available. |
FirewallHost | Name or IP address of firewall (optional). |
FirewallHost | Name or IP address of firewall (optional). |
FirewallPassword | Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall. |
FirewallPassword | Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall. |
FirewallPort | The TCP port for the FirewallHost;. |
FirewallPort | The TCP port for the FirewallHost;. |
FirewallType | Determines the type of firewall to connect through. |
FirewallType | Determines the type of firewall to connect through. |
FirewallUser | A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall. |
FirewallUser | A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall. |
KeepAliveInterval | The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received. |
KeepAliveInterval | The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received. |
KeepAliveTime | The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent. |
KeepAliveTime | The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent. |
Linger | When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully. |
Linger | When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully. |
LingerTime | Time in seconds to have the connection linger. |
LingerTime | Time in seconds to have the connection linger. |
LocalHost | The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted. |
LocalHost | The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted. |
LocalPort | The port in the local host where the class binds. |
LocalPort | The port in the local host where the class binds. |
MaxLineLength | The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found. |
MaxLineLength | The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found. |
MaxTransferRate | The transfer rate limit in bytes per second. |
MaxTransferRate | The transfer rate limit in bytes per second. |
ProxyExceptionsList | A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy. |
ProxyExceptionsList | A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy. |
TCPKeepAlive | Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled. |
TCPKeepAlive | Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled. |
TcpNoDelay | Whether or not to delay when sending packets. |
TcpNoDelay | Whether or not to delay when sending packets. |
UseIPv6 | Whether to use IPv6. |
UseIPv6 | Whether to use IPv6. |
LogSSLPackets | Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API. |
LogSSLPackets | Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API. |
OpenSSLCADir | The path to a directory containing CA certificates. |
OpenSSLCADir | The path to a directory containing CA certificates. |
OpenSSLCAFile | Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application. |
OpenSSLCAFile | Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application. |
OpenSSLCipherList | A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL. |
OpenSSLCipherList | A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL. |
OpenSSLPrngSeedData | The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG). |
OpenSSLPrngSeedData | The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG). |
ReuseSSLSession | Determines if the SSL session is reused. |
ReuseSSLSession | Determines if the SSL session is reused. |
SSLCACertFilePaths | The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux. |
SSLCACertFilePaths | The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux. |
SSLCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake. |
SSLCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake. |
SSLCheckCRL | Whether to check the Certificate Revocation List for the server certificate. |
SSLCheckCRL | Whether to check the Certificate Revocation List for the server certificate. |
SSLCheckOCSP | Whether to use OCSP to check the status of the server certificate. |
SSLCheckOCSP | Whether to use OCSP to check the status of the server certificate. |
SSLCipherStrength | The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption. |
SSLCipherStrength | The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption. |
SSLClientCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation. |
SSLClientCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation. |
SSLEnabledCipherSuites | The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation. |
SSLEnabledCipherSuites | The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation. |
SSLEnabledProtocols | Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols. |
SSLEnabledProtocols | Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols. |
SSLEnableRenegotiation | Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported. |
SSLEnableRenegotiation | Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported. |
SSLIncludeCertChain | Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event. |
SSLIncludeCertChain | Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event. |
SSLKeyLogFile | The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes. |
SSLKeyLogFile | The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes. |
SSLNegotiatedCipher | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipher | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength | Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength | Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite | Returns the negotiated cipher suite. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength. |
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength | Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength. |
SSLNegotiatedVersion | Returns the negotiated protocol version. |
SSLNegotiatedVersion | Returns the negotiated protocol version. |
SSLSecurityFlags | Flags that control certificate verification. |
SSLSecurityFlags | Flags that control certificate verification. |
SSLServerCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation. |
SSLServerCACerts | A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation. |
TLS12SignatureAlgorithms | Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal. |
TLS12SignatureAlgorithms | Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal. |
TLS12SupportedGroups | The supported groups for ECC. |
TLS12SupportedGroups | The supported groups for ECC. |
TLS13KeyShareGroups | The groups for which to pregenerate key shares. |
TLS13KeyShareGroups | The groups for which to pregenerate key shares. |
TLS13SignatureAlgorithms | The allowed certificate signature algorithms. |
TLS13SignatureAlgorithms | The allowed certificate signature algorithms. |
TLS13SupportedGroups | The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange. |
TLS13SupportedGroups | The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange. |
AbsoluteTimeout | Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts. |
AbsoluteTimeout | Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts. |
FirewallData | Used to send extra data to the firewall. |
FirewallData | Used to send extra data to the firewall. |
InBufferSize | The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket. |
InBufferSize | The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket. |
OutBufferSize | The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket. |
OutBufferSize | The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket. |
BuildInfo | Information about the product's build. |
CodePage | The system code page used for Unicode to Multibyte translations. |
LicenseInfo | Information about the current license. |
MaskSensitiveData | Whether sensitive data is masked in log messages. |
ProcessIdleEvents | Whether the class uses its internal event loop to process events when the main thread is idle. |
SelectWaitMillis | The length of time in milliseconds the class will wait when DoEvents is called if there are no events to process. |
UseInternalSecurityAPI | Whether or not to use the system security libraries or an internal implementation. |
application_id property
Identifies the merchant application to the Datawire System.
Syntax
def get_application_id() -> str: ... def set_application_id(value: str) -> None: ...
application_id = property(get_application_id, set_application_id)
Default Value
"NSOFTDIRECTPXML"
Remarks
The Application Id identifies the application that has generated and is sending the transaction. This is a 15 character alphanumeric code that identifies each application and is provided by the Datawire Secure Transport Vendor Integration Team
This property may be validated along with the datawire_id as connection credentials.
The default value of this property is a value used for testing with Rapid Connect. You may be required to have a new application_id assigned for the software you create with this class.
installment_description property
The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
Syntax
def get_installment_description() -> str: ... def set_installment_description(value: str) -> None: ...
installment_description = property(get_installment_description, set_installment_description)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.
The maximum length of this field is 15 characters.
installment_invoice_number property
The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
Syntax
def get_installment_invoice_number() -> str: ... def set_installment_invoice_number(value: str) -> None: ...
installment_invoice_number = property(get_installment_invoice_number, set_installment_invoice_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.
The maximum length of this field is 12 characters.
installment_type property
The type of the Installment payment.
Syntax
def get_installment_type() -> int: ... def set_installment_type(value: int) -> None: ...
installment_type = property(get_installment_type, set_installment_type)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # Merchant
2 # ThirdParty
3 # Issuer
Default Value
0
Remarks
The type of the Installment payment.
This field is required for all Discover, Diners (including JCB - US Domestic) Installment transactions transactionindicator value 3 (tiInstallment) and it is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:
0 (itUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (itMerchant) | Merchant - Merchant Installment Payment |
2 (itThirdParty) | ThirdParty - Third Party Installment Payment |
3 (itIssuer) | Issuer - Issuer Installment Payment |
merchant_advice_code property
This property contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.
Syntax
def get_merchant_advice_code() -> str: ...
merchant_advice_code = property(get_merchant_advice_code, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.
The following values are defined:
Response Code | Meaning |
01 | New account information available |
02 | Try again later (must wait 72 hours before sending the recurring transaction again) |
03 | Do not try again |
04 | Token requirements are not fulfilled for this token type |
05 | Card account closed or fraud |
06 | Cardholder canceled recurring payment |
07 | Cancel specific payment |
21 | Do not honor - Issuer has blocked recurring payment service / Payment Cancellation |
22 | Merchant does not qualify for product code |
24 | Retry after 1 hour |
25 | Retry after 24 hours |
26 | Retry after 2 days |
27 | Retry after 4 days |
28 | Retry after 6 days |
29 | Retry after 8 days |
30 | Retry after 10 days |
This property is read-only.
mit_amount property
The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.
Syntax
def get_mit_amount() -> str: ... def set_mit_amount(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_amount = property(get_mit_amount, set_mit_amount)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
mit_amount_type property
Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.
Syntax
def get_mit_amount_type() -> int: ... def set_mit_amount_type(value: int) -> None: ...
mit_amount_type = property(get_mit_amount_type, set_mit_amount_type)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # Fixed
2 # Variable
Default Value
0
Remarks
Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.
The following values are defined:
0 (atUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (atFixed) | Fixed - subscription (e.g. monthly newspaper subscription) |
2 (atVariable) | Variable - standing order (e.g. monthly utility payment) |
mit_frequency property
This property indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.
Syntax
def get_mit_frequency() -> int: ... def set_mit_frequency(value: int) -> None: ...
mit_frequency = property(get_mit_frequency, set_mit_frequency)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # Daily
2 # Weekly
3 # Biweekly
4 # Monthly
5 # Quarterly
6 # Biannually
7 # Annually
8 # Unscheduled
9 # TenDays
10 # TwiceWeekly
11 # EveryTwoMonths
12 # Trimester
Default Value
0
Remarks
This field indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.
The following values are defined:
0 (freqUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (freqDaily) | Daily |
2 (freqWeekly) | Weekly |
3 (freqBiweekly) | Biweekly / Fortnightly |
4 (freqMonthly) | Monthly |
5 (freqQuarterly) | Quarterly |
6 (freqBiannually) | Half-Yearly (Biannually) |
7 (freqAnnually) | Annually |
8 (freqUnscheduled) | Unscheduled (Type of MIT) |
9 (freqTenDays) | Ten days |
10 (freqTwiceWeekly) | Twice weekly |
11 (freqEveryTwoMonths) | Every two months |
12 (freqTrimester) | Trimester |
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
When the Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners', the valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
For Visa Recurring transactions, valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12.
For Visa Installment transactions, valid values are 2, 3, or 4.
mit_payment_currency property
Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.
Syntax
def get_mit_payment_currency() -> str: ... def set_mit_payment_currency(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_payment_currency = property(get_mit_payment_currency, set_mit_payment_currency)
Default Value
"840"
Remarks
Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. For US Dollars, use "840".
mit_recurring_payment_type property
This property contains the type of Recurring Payment.
Syntax
def get_mit_recurring_payment_type() -> int: ... def set_mit_recurring_payment_type(value: int) -> None: ...
mit_recurring_payment_type = property(get_mit_recurring_payment_type, set_mit_recurring_payment_type)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # Registration
2 # Subsequent
3 # Modification
4 # Cancellation
Default Value
0
Remarks
This field contains the type of Recurring Payment.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. The following values are defined:
0 (rptUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (rptRegistration) | Registration / first transaction |
2 (rptSubsequent) | Subsequent transaction |
3 (rptModification) | Modification |
4 (rptCancellation) | Cancellation |
mit_registration_ref_num property
This property contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.
Syntax
def get_mit_registration_ref_num() -> str: ... def set_mit_registration_ref_num(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_registration_ref_num = property(get_mit_registration_ref_num, set_mit_registration_ref_num)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'.
The maximum length of this field is 35 characters.
mit_sequence_indicator property
Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.
Syntax
def get_mit_sequence_indicator() -> int: ... def set_mit_sequence_indicator(value: int) -> None: ...
mit_sequence_indicator = property(get_mit_sequence_indicator, set_mit_sequence_indicator)
Default Value
0
Remarks
Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.
This field should be populated in ascending order and is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
Valid values for this field are numbers from 0 to 99.
mit_total_payment_amount property
This property contains the Total Installment Amount.
Syntax
def get_mit_total_payment_amount() -> str: ... def set_mit_total_payment_amount(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_total_payment_amount = property(get_mit_total_payment_amount, set_mit_total_payment_amount)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field contains the Total Installment Amount.
This field is only applicable for Visa Installment transactions. Note : The total amount cannot exceed USD 500,000.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
mit_total_payment_count property
The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.
Syntax
def get_mit_total_payment_count() -> str: ... def set_mit_total_payment_count(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_total_payment_count = property(get_mit_total_payment_count, set_mit_total_payment_count)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.
The following values are defined:
Value | Description |
01 to 99 | Installment Count |
UD | Not Defined |
UC | Until Canceled |
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'. For Discover, the valid values should be from 02 to 99, UD and UC. For Visa, the valid values should be from 01 to 99. Note: For Visa recurring payments, value of '99' means that recurring payments are authorized until canceled or that the Number of Recurring Payments is not defined.
When this field is sent for Visa or Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners), the Bill Payment Transaction Indicator must be present with the value of 'Recurring' or 'Installment'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field can only be sent when the Installment Type field contains the value of 'Merchant' or 'ThirdParty'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field must be sent for ALL Installment transactions for a series of payments, and the original CIT transaction must be initiated with 3DS.
The maximum length of this field is 2 characters.
mit_unique_id property
This property is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment.
Syntax
def get_mit_unique_id() -> str: ... def set_mit_unique_id(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_unique_id = property(get_mit_unique_id, set_mit_unique_id)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment. This ID is used to reference authorization transactions.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB' or 'Diners'.
The maximum length of this field is 14 characters.
mit_validation_flag property
Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.
Syntax
def get_mit_validation_flag() -> int: ... def set_mit_validation_flag(value: int) -> None: ...
mit_validation_flag = property(get_mit_validation_flag, set_mit_validation_flag)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # Validated
2 # NotValidated
Default Value
0
Remarks
Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
The following values are defined:
0 (vfUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (vfValidated) | Validated Card Transaction |
2 (vfNotValidated) | Not Validated Card Transaction |
mit_validation_ref property
This property contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.
Syntax
def get_mit_validation_ref() -> str: ... def set_mit_validation_ref(value: str) -> None: ...
mit_validation_ref = property(get_mit_validation_ref, set_mit_validation_ref)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.
This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.
The maximum length of this field is 20 characters.
transaction_indicator property
Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made.
Syntax
def get_transaction_indicator() -> int: ... def set_transaction_indicator(value: int) -> None: ...
transaction_indicator = property(get_transaction_indicator, set_transaction_indicator)
Possible Values
0 # Unspecified
1 # SingleTransaction
2 # Recurring
3 # Installment
4 # DeferredBilling
Default Value
0
Remarks
Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made.
This property contains the type of bill payment being made. This is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:
0 (tiUnspecified - default) | Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request. |
1 (tiSingleTransaction) | Single transaction |
2 (tiRecurring) | Recurring transaction |
3 (tiInstallment) | Installment transaction |
4 (tiDeferredBilling) | Deferred Billing transaction |
To settle an Installment transaction, you must use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to add the number of this installment and the total count of all installments to be made. For instance, if the purchase was for "Three easy payments of $19.95", and this is the first payment, then the installment number will be 1, and the installment count 3. An example is included below:
FDMSRcECommerce.Config("BillPaymentType=3") // 3=Installment
FDMSRcECommerce.TransactionAmount = "1995"
FDMSRcECommerce.AuthOnly()
FDMSRcDetailRecord.ParseAggregate(FDMSRcECommerce.GetDetailAggregate())
FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentCount = 3
FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentNumber = 1
FDMSRcSettle.DetailRecordAggregate(5) = FDMSRcDetailRecord.GetDetailAggregate()
card_type property
Type of credit card being used in this transaction.
Syntax
def get_card_type() -> int: ... def set_card_type(value: int) -> None: ...
card_type = property(get_card_type, set_card_type)
Possible Values
0 # Unknown
1 # Visa
2 # MasterCard
3 # AMEX
4 # Discover
5 # Diners
6 # JCB
7 # VisaElectron
8 # Maestro
10 # Laser
Default Value
0
Remarks
Type of credit card being used in this transaction. This property contains the customer's credit card type. This is automatically computed after the number is set, but it can also be changed manually. A list of valid card types is included below.
ctUnknown (0) | Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known. |
ctVisa (1) | Visa or Delta Card. |
ctMasterCard (2) | MasterCard. |
ctAMEX (3) | American Express Card. |
ctDiscover (4) | Discover Card. |
ctDiners (5) | Diners Club or Carte Blanche Card. |
ctJCB (6) | JCB Card. |
ctVisaElectron (7) | Visa Electron Card (runs as a Visa for most gateways) |
ctMaestro (8) | Maestro Card |
ctLaser (10) | Laser Card (Ireland) |
card_cvv_data property
Three digit security code on back of card (optional).
Syntax
def get_card_cvv_data() -> str: ... def set_card_cvv_data(value: str) -> None: ...
card_cvv_data = property(get_card_cvv_data, set_card_cvv_data)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Three digit security code on back of card (optional).
This alphanumeric property contains the three digit Visa "Card Verification Value" (CVV), MasterCard "Card Verification Code" (CVC), or four-digit American Express "Card Identification Number" (CID). This value appears as additional characters embossed on the card signature line following the credit card account number on the back of the credit card. This is an optional property which can be used to determine if the customer is actually in possession of the credit card.
Even if the cvvdata is incorrect, the transaction may still be authorized. It is up to the merchant to examine the ResponseCVVResult property and decide whether to honor the transaction or not.
Note: When set to a non-empty value, cvvpresence will be automatically set to cvpProvided. If set to empty string (""), cvvpresence will be automatically set to cvpNotProvided.
card_cvv_presence property
Indicates the presence of the card verification value.
Syntax
def get_card_cvv_presence() -> int: ... def set_card_cvv_presence(value: int) -> None: ...
card_cvv_presence = property(get_card_cvv_presence, set_card_cvv_presence)
Possible Values
0 # NotProvided
1 # Provided
2 # Illegible
3 # NotOnCard
Default Value
0
Remarks
Indicates the presence of the card verification value.
This property is used to indicate the presence of cvvdata.
The class will automatically set this value to cvpProvided when a cvvdata value is specified. You can explicitly specify the cvvpresence indicator by setting this property.
Available values are:
- cvpNotProvided (0)
- cvpProvided (1)
- cvpIllegible (2)
- cvpNotOnCard (3)
card_entry_data_source property
This property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data.
Syntax
def get_card_entry_data_source() -> int: ... def set_card_entry_data_source(value: int) -> None: ...
card_entry_data_source = property(get_card_entry_data_source, set_card_entry_data_source)
Possible Values
0 # Track1
1 # Track2
2 # ManualEntryTrack1Capable
3 # ManualEntryTrack2Capable
4 # ManualEntryNoCardReader
5 # Track1Contactless
6 # Track2Contactless
7 # ManualEntryContactlessCapable
8 # IVR
9 # Kiosk
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data. The table below shows all supported values for this property.
edsTrack1 (0) | Full Magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 1. |
edsTrack2 (1) | Full magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 2. |
edsManualEntryTrack1Capable (2) | Manually keyed, Track 1 capable. |
edsManualEntryTrack2Capable (3) | Manually keyed, Track 2 capable. |
edsManualEntryNoCardReader (4) | Manually keyed, terminal has no card reading capability (use this for e-commerce and MOTO transactions). |
edsTrack1Contactless (5) | Full magnetic stripe read (Track 1 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only). |
edsTrack2Contactless (6) | Full magnetic stripe read (Track 2 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only). |
edsManualEntryContactlessCapable (7) | Manually keyed, Chip Card read capable terminal (Visa, MasterCard, and JCB transactions only). |
edsIVR (8) | Interactive Voice Response processing. This is applicable to Mail Order/Telephone Order (MOTO) transactions. (number, expmonth, and expyear are sent). |
edsKiosk (9) | Automated kiosk transaction. Track1 or Track2 data must be sent in magneticstripe, the transaction cannot be manually entered. |
Below is a list of processors and their support EntryDataSource values:
FDMS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable, edsIVR, edsKiosk
FDMSOmaha - All EntryDataSources applicable
FDMS Rapid Connect - All EntryDataSources applicable
Global - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsIVR, edsKiosk
PTech - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable
TSYS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable
TSYSHC - Values are based on Industry type.
TSYSHCBenefit | edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable |
TSYSHCECommerce | edsManualEntryNoCardReader |
TSYSHCRetail | edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable |
card_exp_month property
Expiration month of the credit card specified in Number .
Syntax
def get_card_exp_month() -> int: ... def set_card_exp_month(value: int) -> None: ...
card_exp_month = property(get_card_exp_month, set_card_exp_month)
Default Value
1
Remarks
Expiration month of the credit card specified in number.
This property contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card, and must be in the range 1 - 12.
card_exp_year property
Expiration year of the credit card specified in Number .
Syntax
def get_card_exp_year() -> int: ... def set_card_exp_year(value: int) -> None: ...
card_exp_year = property(get_card_exp_year, set_card_exp_year)
Default Value
2000
Remarks
Expiration year of the credit card specified in number.
This property contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card. This property must be in the range 0 - 99, or 2000 - 2099. Any date before the year 2000 or after 2099 cannot be specified.
card_is_encrypted property
Determines whether data set to the Number or MagneticStripe properties is validated.
Syntax
def get_card_is_encrypted() -> bool: ... def set_card_is_encrypted(value: bool) -> None: ...
card_is_encrypted = property(get_card_is_encrypted, set_card_is_encrypted)
Default Value
FALSE
Remarks
Determines whether data set to the number or magneticstripe fields is validated.
By default, when the number or magneticstripe fields are set, the value will be validated and normalized. For instance, "4444-33332222 1111" will be normalized as "4444333322221111" and magneticstripe data will be parsed for the track specified by entrydatasource. However, any other non-numerical data entered will cause an exception to be thrown. It may be useful in some gateways to send other data in the number or magneticstripe fields, and this can be accomplished by setting IsEncrypted to true. However, please note that in doing so automatic calculation of the cardtype may be affected, and the card number will not be verified.
card_magnetic_stripe property
Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.
Syntax
def get_card_magnetic_stripe() -> str: ... def set_card_magnetic_stripe(value: str) -> None: ...
card_magnetic_stripe = property(get_card_magnetic_stripe, set_card_magnetic_stripe)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.
If entrydatasource is not one of the manually entered enumerations, then this property must be set with the track1 or track2 data from the magnetic stripe on the back of the customer's credit card. This includes everything after but not including the start sentinel (% or ;) and up to but not including the end sentinel (?) and LRC check character. You may only set this property with track 1 or track 2 data, and may not pass both. Use the entrydatasource property to indicate which track you are sending.
The following example shows how to set the magneticstripe and entrydatasource properties if the data read off the card is "%B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678?;4788250000028291=05121015432112345678?"
class.CardMagneticStripe = "B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678"
class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack1
or
class.CardMagneticStripe = "4788250000028291=05121015432112345678"
class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack2
Industry regulations do not allow merchants or processors to store track data in any form of persistent storage. Failure to abide by this regulation can result in significant fines and other penalties.
card_number property
Customer's credit card number for the transaction.
Syntax
def get_card_number() -> str: ... def set_card_number(value: str) -> None: ...
card_number = property(get_card_number, set_card_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Customer's credit card number for the transaction.
If you're sending the transaction with magneticstripe data, this property should be left empty.
cash_back property
Optional cash back amount to return to the customer.
Syntax
def get_cash_back() -> str: ... def set_cash_back(value: str) -> None: ...
cash_back = property(get_cash_back, set_cash_back)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property specifies the amount of CashBack requested. This property is valid for Debit, EBT, and Credit (Discover Only) transactions.
Note: The CashBack amount for Discover cannot be greater than $100.00 and must be less than the purchase amount. For example, if the purchase is $50.00, the maximum CashBack amount is $50.00.
For cash back transactions, the transaction_amount must contain the sum total of the purchase amount PLUS the cash_back amount. If the purchase is for $10 and the customer requests $20 cash back, cash_back should be set to "2000" and transaction_amount must contain "3000".
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
datawire_id property
Identifies the merchant to the Datawire System.
Syntax
def get_datawire_id() -> str: ... def set_datawire_id(value: str) -> None: ...
datawire_id = property(get_datawire_id, set_datawire_id)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Datawire Id is a unique customer identifier generated by Datawire and returned to the client after successfully registering the merchant (using the FDMSRegister class). This Id (which is sent in all subsequent transactions) allows a transaction, to pass through the Datawire system and be correctly routed to the FDMS Payment processor.
The maximum length for this property is 32 characters.
emv_data property
The EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card.
Syntax
def get_emv_data() -> str: ... def set_emv_data(value: str) -> None: ...
emv_data = property(get_emv_data, set_emv_data)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This configuration setting takes the entire TLV (tag-length-value) response received from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card. The class will send this data in an authorization request.
Retail EMV Example
Fdmsrcretail fdmsrcretail = new Fdmsrcretail();
fdmsrcretail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail;
fdmsrcretail.TPPID = "AAA000";
fdmsrcretail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
fdmsrcretail.MerchantId = "1234";
fdmsrcretail.GroupId = "20001";
fdmsrcretail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
fdmsrcretail.VisaIdentifier = "01000000000000";
fdmsrcretail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
fdmsrcretail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
fdmsrcretail.STAN = "112";
fdmsrcretail.TransactionNumber = "120013";
fdmsrcretail.ReferenceNumber = "123456";
fdmsrcretail.OrderNumber = "12000503";
fdmsrcretail.Card.MagneticStripe = "4761739001010010=15122011143804489";
fdmsrcretail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack2;
fdmsrcretail.TransactionAmount = "250";
fdmsrcretail.EMVData = "9F4005F000F0A0019F...F7906123456789012";
fdmsrcretail.Sale();
encrypted_pin property
DUKPT DES encrypted pin block, retrieved from a PIN pad.
Syntax
def get_encrypted_pin() -> str: ... def set_encrypted_pin(value: str) -> None: ...
encrypted_pin = property(get_encrypted_pin, set_encrypted_pin)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A 16-byte encrypted PIN and associated ksn are required for all debit sale and credit transactions. These values must be retrieved from a certified DUKPT DES pin pad device.
This value is required for all transactions except Full Reversals.
Debit Sale Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200";
debit.Sale();
group_id property
The Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants.
Syntax
def get_group_id() -> str: ... def set_group_id(value: str) -> None: ...
group_id = property(get_group_id, set_group_id)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property specifies the FDMS assigned group Id. This Id identifies the merchant or group of merchants. This property is required.
industry_type property
The merchant's industry type.
Syntax
def get_industry_type() -> int: ... def set_industry_type(value: int) -> None: ...
industry_type = property(get_industry_type, set_industry_type)
Possible Values
0 # Retail
1 # Restaurant
Default Value
0
Remarks
The merchant's industry type. Possible values are:
0 (fditRetail - default) | Retail |
1 (fditRestaurant) | Restaurant |
ksn property
Clear-text Key Sequence Number retrieved from a PIN pad.
Syntax
def get_ksn() -> str: ... def set_ksn(value: str) -> None: ...
ksn = property(get_ksn, set_ksn)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A 19 or 20-byte Key Sequence Number (KSN) and associated encrypted_pin are required for all debit sale and credit transactions. These values must be retrieved from a certified DUKPT DES pin pad device. A 20-byte Key Sequence Number consists of a 1-byte pad character ('F'), a 9-byte Base Derivation Key Id (BDK ID), a 5-byte device Id, and a 5-byte transaction counter. If this property is set with a Key Sequence Number less than 20 bytes in length, the class will pad it on the left with 'F' characters.
This value is required for all transactions except Full Reversals.
Debit Sale Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200";
debit.Sale();
merchant_id property
A unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems.
Syntax
def get_merchant_id() -> str: ... def set_merchant_id(value: str) -> None: ...
merchant_id = property(get_merchant_id, set_merchant_id)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property holds the Merchant Id assigned by FDMS. The value is an alphanumeric value up to 16 characters in length.
This property is required.
merchant_terminal_number property
Used to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location.
Syntax
def get_merchant_terminal_number() -> str: ... def set_merchant_terminal_number(value: str) -> None: ...
merchant_terminal_number = property(get_merchant_terminal_number, set_merchant_terminal_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property contains a number assigned by FDMS to uniquely identify a terminal within a merchant location. The value is numeric and may be up to 8 digits in length.
This property is required.
order_number property
A merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction.
Syntax
def get_order_number() -> str: ... def set_order_number(value: str) -> None: ...
order_number = property(get_order_number, set_order_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property holds a merchant assigned order number that uniquely identifies the transaction. This must hold a numeric value up to 8 digits in length. This value cannot be all zeros.
This value is required for ECommerce and MOTO transactions. This value is optional for Retail transactions.
proxy_auth_scheme property
The type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy.
Syntax
def get_proxy_auth_scheme() -> int: ... def set_proxy_auth_scheme(value: int) -> None: ...
proxy_auth_scheme = property(get_proxy_auth_scheme, set_proxy_auth_scheme)
Possible Values
0 # Basic
1 # Digest
2 # Proprietary
3 # None
4 # Ntlm
5 # Negotiate
Default Value
0
Remarks
The type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy. This is used only when the user and password properties are set.
authscheme should be set to authNone (3) when no authentication is expected.
By default, authscheme is authBasic (0), and if the user and password properties are set, the class will attempt basic authentication.
If authscheme is set to authDigest (1), digest authentication will be attempted instead.
If authscheme is set to authProprietary (2), then the authorization token will not be generated by the class. Look at the configuration file for the class being used to find more information about manually setting this token.
If authscheme is set to authNtlm (4), NTLM authentication will be used.
For security reasons, setting this property will clear the values of user and password.
proxy_auto_detect property
Whether to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available.
Syntax
def get_proxy_auto_detect() -> bool: ... def set_proxy_auto_detect(value: bool) -> None: ...
proxy_auto_detect = property(get_proxy_auto_detect, set_proxy_auto_detect)
Default Value
FALSE
Remarks
Whether to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available. The default value is False.
proxy_password property
A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
Syntax
def get_proxy_password() -> str: ... def set_proxy_password(value: str) -> None: ...
proxy_password = property(get_proxy_password, set_proxy_password)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
If authscheme is set to Basic Authentication, the user and password properties are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].
If authscheme is set to Digest Authentication, the user and password properties are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.
If authscheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the user and password properties are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.
proxy_port property
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy Server (default 80).
Syntax
def get_proxy_port() -> int: ... def set_proxy_port(value: int) -> None: ...
proxy_port = property(get_proxy_port, set_proxy_port)
Default Value
80
Remarks
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy server (default 80). See the description of the server property for details.
proxy_server property
If a proxy Server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.
Syntax
def get_proxy_server() -> str: ... def set_proxy_server(value: str) -> None: ...
proxy_server = property(get_proxy_server, set_proxy_server)
Default Value
""
Remarks
If a proxy server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.
If the server property is set to a domain name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the server property is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
proxy_ssl property
When to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy.
Syntax
def get_proxy_ssl() -> int: ... def set_proxy_ssl(value: int) -> None: ...
proxy_ssl = property(get_proxy_ssl, set_proxy_ssl)
Possible Values
0 # Automatic
1 # Always
2 # Never
3 # Tunnel
Default Value
0
Remarks
When to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy. The applicable values are as follows:
psAutomatic (0) | Default setting. If the URL is an https URL, the class will use the psTunnel option. If the URL is an http URL, the class will use the psNever option. |
psAlways (1) | The connection is always SSL-enabled. |
psNever (2) | The connection is not SSL-enabled. |
psTunnel (3) | The connection is made through a tunneling (HTTP) proxy. |
proxy_user property
A username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
Syntax
def get_proxy_user() -> str: ... def set_proxy_user(value: str) -> None: ...
proxy_user = property(get_proxy_user, set_proxy_user)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
If authscheme is set to Basic Authentication, the user and password properties are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].
If authscheme is set to Digest Authentication, the user and password properties are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.
If authscheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the user and password properties are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.
reference_number property
A value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions.
Syntax
def get_reference_number() -> str: ... def set_reference_number(value: str) -> None: ...
reference_number = property(get_reference_number, set_reference_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This value is a merchant assigned 12 digit value. The value must be unique within a day for a given merchant id and terminal id. When performing a capture or reverse transaction this must be the same as the original transaction.
response_approval_code property
The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.
Syntax
def get_response_approval_code() -> str: ...
response_approval_code = property(get_response_approval_code, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.
This value holds the approval code returned by the authorizer. This value will contain up to 8 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and spaces will be returned.
This property is read-only.
response_authorized_amount property
The amount actually charged to the card.
Syntax
def get_response_authorized_amount() -> str: ...
response_authorized_amount = property(get_response_authorized_amount, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The amount actually charged to the card.
This value holds the amount charged to the card. In the case of a partial authorization this will be different than the amount specified in transactionamount.
You must collect the remainder via another form of payment, or Reverse the authorization if the customer does not have an additional form of payment.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
This property is read-only.
response_authorizing_network_id property
This property indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.
Syntax
def get_response_authorizing_network_id() -> str: ...
response_authorizing_network_id = property(get_response_authorizing_network_id, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.
This value is up to 3 alphanumeric characters.
This property is read-only.
response_authorizing_network_name property
This property indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.
Syntax
def get_response_authorizing_network_name() -> str: ...
response_authorizing_network_name = property(get_response_authorizing_network_name, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This field indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.
This property is read-only.
response_avs_result property
Contains the Address Verification System result code.
Syntax
def get_response_avs_result() -> str: ...
response_avs_result = property(get_response_avs_result, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains the Address Verification System result code.
This one character field contains the Address Verification System (AVS) result code. This property is populated if a value is present in the response. An AVS result code can provide additional information concerning the authentication of a particular transaction for which cardholder address verification was requested. Possible AVS codes are listed in the table below.
Visa Card AVS Codes
Code | Description |
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
B | Street addresses match; postal code not verified due to incompatible formats |
C | Street address and postal code not verified |
D | Street address and postal code match (International only) |
F | Street address and postal code match (UK) |
G | Address information not verified for international transaction. Issuer is not an AVS Participant, or, AVS data was present in the request but the issuer did not return an AVS result, or no address on file (International only) |
I | Address verification service not performed (International only) |
M | Street address and postal codes match (International only) |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match |
P | Postal code matches; street address not verified |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
Y | Both postal code and address match |
Z | Postal code matches, Street address does not match or Street address not included in request |
MasterCard AVS Codes
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
E | Error: Transaction ineligible for address verification or edit error found in the message that prevents AVS from being performed |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
W | U.S. - Street Address does not match, nine digit postal code matches; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not |
X | Exact: U.S. - Address and 9-digit postal code match; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not |
Y | Yes: Address and 5-digit postal code match for US address |
Z | Five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
Amex AVS Codes
A | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches |
R | Retry, system unavailable to process |
S | Service not supported |
U | Address information is unavailable |
Y | Both postal code and address match |
Z | Nine or five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
L | Card member Name and Billing Postal Code match |
M | Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code match |
O | Card member Name and Billing Address match |
K | Card member Name matches |
D | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Postal Code matches |
E | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address and Postal Code match |
F | Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address matches |
W | No, Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code are all incorrect |
Discover or JCB
A | Both address and five digit postal code match |
G | Address information not verified for international transaction |
N | No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches |
R | Retry, system unable to process |
S | Service not supported |
T | No data received from Issuer |
W | Nine digit postal code matches, address does not match |
X | All digits match (nine digit zip code) |
Y | Street address matches, postal code does not match |
Z | Five digit postal code matches, address does not match |
This property is read-only.
response_balance property
Contains the remaining available balance left on the card.
Syntax
def get_response_balance() -> str: ...
response_balance = property(get_response_balance, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains the remaining available balance left on the card.
This balance amount will only be returned for prepaid cards.
This property is read-only.
response_card_level_result property
This property is only applicable to Visa card.
Syntax
def get_response_card_level_result() -> str: ...
response_card_level_result = property(get_response_card_level_result, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property is only applicable to Visa card. This property holds a two character value returned by Visa to designate the type of card product used to process the transaction.
This property is read-only.
response_code property
Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.
Syntax
def get_response_code() -> str: ...
response_code = property(get_response_code, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.
This property contains a 3 digit code indicating success or the reason of failure. A value of 000 indicates approval. For all other values please see the Response Codes section.
This property is read-only.
response_commercial_card property
Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.
Syntax
def get_response_commercial_card() -> int: ...
response_commercial_card = property(get_response_commercial_card, None)
Possible Values
0 # NotCommercial
1 # PurchaseCard
2 # CorporateCard
3 # BusinessCard
4 # Unknown
Default Value
0
Remarks
Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.
This is only applicable to Visa cards. Visa Business, corporate, and purchasing cards are subsets of commercial cards. Therefore, the user should send Level 2 (and possibly Level 3) data when calling capture when this property indicates a commercial card was used. The following table indicates the type of commercial card:
fccNotCommercial (0) | Card presented for authorization is not a commercial card |
fccPurchaseCard (1) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Purchasing Card. |
fccCorporateCard (2) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Corporate Card. |
fccBusinessCard (3) | Card presented for authorization is a Visa Business Card. |
fccUnknown (4) | Unable to obtain information from processor. |
Note: Tax amounts should be included with the Level2 or Level3 data when calling capture in order to receive the best interchange rate.
This property is read-only.
response_cvv_result property
Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).
Syntax
def get_response_cvv_result() -> str: ...
response_cvv_result = property(get_response_cvv_result, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).
If a CVV value was sent in the authorization, this property will contain the host returned Card Verification Value result code. This property is populated if a value is present in the response. The following is a list of current result codes:
Match | Values match |
NoMtch | Values do not match |
NotPrc | Not processed |
NotPrv | Value not provided |
NotPrt | Issuer not participating |
Unknwn | Unknown |
This property is read-only.
response_datawire_return_code property
Contains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received.
Syntax
def get_response_datawire_return_code() -> str: ...
response_datawire_return_code = property(get_response_datawire_return_code, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains an error code providing more details about the datawirestatus received.
When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the datawirestatus will be "OK" and the datawirereturncode will be "000". These two properties have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This property only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.
The approvalcode contains the actual transaction result that was returned by FDMS.
The following is a list of possible Datawire return codes:
000 | Transaction successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment Processor and back. |
200 | Host Busy - The processor's Host is busy and is currently unable to service this request. |
201 | Host Unavailable - The processor's Host is currently unavailable. For example, the server is sending NAK. |
202 | Host Connect Error - Could not connect to the processor's Host. |
203 | Host Drop - The processor's Host disconnected during the transaction before sending a response. |
204 | Host Comm Error - An error was encountered while communicating with the processor's Host. |
205 | No Response - No response from the processor's Host |
206 | Host Send Error - An error has encountered when sending the request to the processor, and the Host daemon cannot continue sending packets to the processor because the connection is broken. |
405 | Vxn Timeout - The request could not be processed. |
505 | Network Error - The request could not be processed. |
This property is read-only.
response_datawire_status property
Status of the communication with Datawire.
Syntax
def get_response_datawire_status() -> str: ...
response_datawire_status = property(get_response_datawire_status, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Status of the communication with Datawire.
When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the datawirestatus will be "OK" and the datawirereturncode will be "000". These two properties have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This property only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.
The approvalcode contains the actual FDMS Transaction Result that was returned.
The following is a list of possible Datawire response status codes:
OK | Transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment processor and back. |
AuthenticationError | DatawireId in the request was not successfully authenticated. |
UnknownServiceID | ServiceId part of the URL (in the Service Discovery or Ping request) is unknown. |
WrongSessionContext | The SessionContext element of the Session Transaction request does not match the SessionContext returned by the InitiateSession response (applicable to the FDMSSettle class). |
AccessDenied | Generally, occurs when you try to register a merchant after a merchant has already been activated to use the Datawire VXN. |
Failed | Your Merchant Registration has failed. Contact tech.support@datawire.net for more information. |
Retry | Registration is not yet complete. You must send the Registration request again. |
Timeout | No response from the Service Provider was received during the expected period of time. |
XMLError | Request contains some XML error, such as malformed XML, violation of this DTD, etc. |
OtherError | Unspecified error occurred. |
008 | Network Error |
This property is read-only.
response_emv_data property
Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).
Syntax
def get_response_emv_data() -> str: ...
response_emv_data = property(get_response_emv_data, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).
This property is only applicable to Retail and Debit transactions.
This property is read-only.
response_pos_data property
This property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any).
Syntax
def get_response_pos_data() -> str: ...
response_pos_data = property(get_response_pos_data, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any). This is only applicable to MasterCard, Discover, and AmEx card transactions.
This property is read-only.
response_returned_aci property
Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.
Syntax
def get_response_returned_aci() -> str: ...
response_returned_aci = property(get_response_returned_aci, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.
This one character field contains the returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator (ACI) for Visa transactions. This value provides information concerning the transaction's Customer Payment Service (CPS) qualification status. It is not recommended that the Point of Sale (POS) system attempt to interpret the meaning of this value.
Possible returned ACI values are:
Value | Description |
A | Card Present |
B | Tokenized Ecommerce via mobile device (Payment Token) |
C | Card present with merchant name and location data (cardholder activated) |
E | Card present with merchant name and location data |
F | Card not present, Account Funding |
I | Incremental Authorization |
J | Card not present Recurring bill payment transaction |
K | Key Entered Transaction (error while reading magnetic stripe data) |
N | Not a custom payment service transaction |
P | Card-not-present (preferred customer participation) |
R | Card-not-present, AVS not required |
S | Card not present, e-commerce 3-D secure attempt |
T | Transaction cannot participate in CPS programs |
U | Card not present, 3-D secure |
V | Card-not-present, AVS requested |
W | Card not present, e-commerce non-3-D secure |
This property is read-only.
response_routing_indicator property
Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit.
Syntax
def get_response_routing_indicator() -> str: ...
response_routing_indicator = property(get_response_routing_indicator, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit. Possible values are:
Value | Meaning |
C | Credit |
D | Debit |
This property is read-only.
response_settlement_date property
The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.
Syntax
def get_response_settlement_date() -> str: ...
response_settlement_date = property(get_response_settlement_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.
This property is read-only.
response_text property
This property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the property in error, etc.
Syntax
def get_response_text() -> str: ...
response_text = property(get_response_text, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the field in error, etc. Applications should not be coded to the text in this property as it is subject to change.
This property is read-only.
response_transaction_date property
The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.
Syntax
def get_response_transaction_date() -> str: ...
response_transaction_date = property(get_response_transaction_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.
This 15 digit field contains the transaction date and time returned by the Rapid Connect system. This is not a local datetime, it is the time according the Rapid Connect system.
This property is read-only.
response_transaction_id property
Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number.
Syntax
def get_response_transaction_id() -> str: ...
response_transaction_id = property(get_response_transaction_id, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number.
This property contains a Visa Transaction Id, MasterCard BankNet data, American Express Transaction Id, or Discover Network Result Indicator (NRID). If returned in the response, this property should be printed on the receipt.
This property is read-only.
reversal_transaction_type property
The type of transaction to reverse.
Syntax
def get_reversal_transaction_type() -> int: ... def set_reversal_transaction_type(value: int) -> None: ...
reversal_transaction_type = property(get_reversal_transaction_type, set_reversal_transaction_type)
Possible Values
0 # AuthOnly
1 # Capture
2 # Credit
3 # Sale
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the type of transaction to reverse. Possible values are:
0 (frttAuthOnly - default | AuthOnly. |
1 (frttCapture) | Capture. Only applicable when reversal_type is set to frtTimeoutReversal. |
2 (frttCredit) | Credit. Only applicable when reversal_type is set to frtTimeoutReversal. |
3 (frttSale) | Sale. |
reversal_type property
The type of reversal.
Syntax
def get_reversal_type() -> int: ... def set_reversal_type(value: int) -> None: ...
reversal_type = property(get_reversal_type, set_reversal_type)
Possible Values
0 # FullReversal
1 # TimeoutReversal
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the type of reversal. Possible values are:
0 (fdrtFullReversal - default) | Full Reversal |
1 (fdrtTimeoutReversal) | Timeout Reversal |
Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
- auth_only
- sale
settlement_mode property
Indicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system.
Syntax
def get_settlement_mode() -> int: ... def set_settlement_mode(value: int) -> None: ...
settlement_mode = property(get_settlement_mode, set_settlement_mode)
Possible Values
0 # HostCapture
1 # TerminalCapture
Default Value
0
Remarks
Possible values are:
0 (smiHostCapture - default) | Host Capture |
1 (smiTerminalCapture) | Terminal Capture |
Host-Capture means that you authorize your transactions using the auth_only or sale methods, and you process refunds and capture outstanding authorizations with the credit and capture methods. FDMS Rapid Connect handles all batch management.
Terminal-Capture means that you handle all of the batch management yourself. This is necessary for the Hotel/Lodging industry_type, because the final settlement amount may be more than (or less than) the amount that was originally authorized. For instance, a customer may stay longer or shorter than originally planned, or incur additional charges (mini bar, telephone call, room service, etc), and the settlement amount must be adjusted accordingly.
All industry types may be processed in Terminal Capture mode. However, Hotel/Lodging transactions MUST be authorized and settled in Terminal Capture mode. Attempting to authorize a Hotel/Lodging transaction with the Host Capture mode will cause the class fails with an error.
ssl_accept_server_cert_effective_date property
The date on which this certificate becomes valid.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_effective_date() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_effective_date = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_effective_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which this certificate becomes valid. Before this date, it is not valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2000 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_expiration_date property
The date on which the certificate expires.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_expiration_date() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_expiration_date = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_expiration_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which the certificate expires. After this date, the certificate will no longer be valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2001 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_extended_key_usage property
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_extended_key_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_extended_key_usage = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_extended_key_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. These are the same as ASN.1 object identifiers (OIDs).
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint property
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: bc:2a:72:af:fe:58:17:43:7a:5f:ba:5a:7c:90:f7:02
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 property
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 30:7b:fa:38:65:83:ff:da:b4:4e:07:3f:17:b8:a4:ed:80:be:ff:84
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 property
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 6a:80:5c:33:a9:43:ea:b0:96:12:8a:64:96:30:ef:4a:8a:96:86:ce:f4:c7:be:10:24:8e:2b:60:9e:f3:59:53
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_issuer property
The issuer of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_issuer() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_issuer = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_issuer, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The issuer of the certificate. This property contains a string representation of the name of the issuing authority for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key property
The private key of the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The private key of the certificate (if available). The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
Note: The privatekey may be available but not exportable. In this case, privatekey returns an empty string.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_available property
Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_available() -> bool: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_available = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_available, None)
Default Value
FALSE
Remarks
Whether a privatekey is available for the selected certificate. If privatekeyavailable is True, the certificate may be used for authentication purposes (e.g., server authentication).
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_container property
The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_container() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_container = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_private_key_container, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The name of the privatekey container for the certificate (if available). This functionality is available only on Windows platforms.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key property
The public key of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The public key of the certificate. The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_algorithm property
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_algorithm = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSADH") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_length property
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits).
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_length() -> int: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_length = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_public_key_length, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). Common values are 512, 1024, and 2048.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_serial_number property
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_serial_number() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_serial_number = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_serial_number, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. The number is encoded as a series of hexadecimal digits, with each pair representing a byte of the serial number.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_signature_algorithm property
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_signature_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_signature_algorithm = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_signature_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSAMD5RSA") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_store property
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store() -> bytes: ... def set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store(value: bytes) -> None: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_store = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store, set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store)
Default Value
"MY"
Remarks
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
The storetype property denotes the type of the certificate store specified by store. If the store is password-protected, specify the password in storepassword.
store is used in conjunction with the subject property to specify client certificates. If store has a value, and subject or encoded is set, a search for a certificate is initiated. Please see the subject property for details.
Designations of certificate stores are platform dependent.
The following designations are the most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows:
MY | A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys. |
CA | Certifying authority certificates. |
ROOT | Root certificates. |
When the certificate store type is cstPFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file. When the type is cstPFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e., PKCS#12 certificate store).
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password property
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password() -> str: ... def set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password(value: str) -> None: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password, set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_password)
Default Value
""
Remarks
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type property
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type() -> int: ... def set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type(value: int) -> None: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type, set_ssl_accept_server_cert_store_type)
Possible Values
0 # User
1 # Machine
2 # PFXFile
3 # PFXBlob
4 # JKSFile
5 # JKSBlob
6 # PEMKeyFile
7 # PEMKeyBlob
8 # PublicKeyFile
9 # PublicKeyBlob
10 # SSHPublicKeyBlob
11 # P7BFile
12 # P7BBlob
13 # SSHPublicKeyFile
14 # PPKFile
15 # PPKBlob
16 # XMLFile
17 # XMLBlob
18 # JWKFile
19 # JWKBlob
20 # SecurityKey
21 # BCFKSFile
22 # BCFKSBlob
23 # PKCS11
99 # Auto
Default Value
0
Remarks
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
The class supports both public and private keys in a variety of formats. When the cstAuto value is used, the class will automatically determine the type. This property can take one of the following values:
0 (cstUser - default) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
1 (cstMachine) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a machine store.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
2 (cstPFXFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PFX (PKCS#12) file containing certificates. |
3 (cstPFXBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS#12) format. |
4 (cstJKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a Java Key Store (JKS) file containing certificates.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
5 (cstJKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java Key Store (JKS) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
6 (cstPEMKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
7 (cstPEMKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
8 (cstPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
9 (cstPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
10 (cstSSHPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key. |
11 (cstP7BFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PKCS#7 file containing certificates. |
12 (cstP7BBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) representing a certificate store in PKCS#7 format. |
13 (cstSSHPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains an SSH-style public key. |
14 (cstPPKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
15 (cstPPKBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
16 (cstXMLFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a certificate in XML format. |
17 (cstXMLBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a certificate in XML format. |
18 (cstJWKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
19 (cstJWKBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
21 (cstBCFKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store).
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
22 (cstBCFKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
23 (cstPKCS11) | The certificate is present on a physical security key accessible via a PKCS#11 interface.
To use a security key, the necessary data must first be collected using the CertMgr class. The liststorecertificates method may be called after setting certstoretype to cstPKCS11, certstorepassword to the PIN, and certstore to the full path of the PKCS#11 DLL. The certificate information returned in the oncertlist event's CertEncoded parameter may be saved for later use. When using a certificate, pass the previously saved security key information as the store and set storepassword to the PIN. Code Example. SSH Authentication with Security Key:
|
99 (cstAuto) | The store type is automatically detected from the input data. This setting may be used with both public and private keys and can detect any of the supported formats automatically. |
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject_alt_names property
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject_alt_names() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject_alt_names = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject_alt_names, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 property
The MD5 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_md5() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_md5, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The MD5 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 property
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 property
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage property
The text description of UsageFlags .
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of usageflags.
This value will be one or more of the following strings and will be separated by commas:
- Digital Signature
- Non-Repudiation
- Key Encipherment
- Data Encipherment
- Key Agreement
- Certificate Signing
- CRL Signing
- Encipher Only
If the provider is OpenSSL, the value is a comma-separated list of X.509 certificate extension names.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage_flags property
The flags that show intended use for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_usage_flags() -> int: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_usage_flags = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_usage_flags, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The flags that show intended use for the certificate. The value of usageflags is a combination of the following flags:
0x80 | Digital Signature |
0x40 | Non-Repudiation |
0x20 | Key Encipherment |
0x10 | Data Encipherment |
0x08 | Key Agreement |
0x04 | Certificate Signing |
0x02 | CRL Signing |
0x01 | Encipher Only |
Please see the usage property for a text representation of usageflags.
This functionality currently is not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_version property
The certificate's version number.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_version() -> str: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_version = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_version, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate's version number. The possible values are the strings "V1", "V2", and "V3".
This property is read-only.
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject property
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject() -> str: ... def set_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject(value: str) -> None: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_subject = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject, set_ssl_accept_server_cert_subject)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
This property must be set after all other certificate properties are set. When this property is set, a search is performed in the current certificate store to locate a certificate with a matching subject.
If a matching certificate is found, the property is set to the full subject of the matching certificate.
If an exact match is not found, the store is searched for subjects containing the value of the property.
If a match is still not found, the property is set to an empty string, and no certificate is selected.
The special value "*" picks a random certificate in the certificate store.
The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For instance, "CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=example@email.com". Common fields and their meanings are as follows:
Field | Meaning |
CN | Common Name. This is commonly a hostname like www.server.com. |
O | Organization |
OU | Organizational Unit |
L | Locality |
S | State |
C | Country |
E | Email Address |
If a field value contains a comma, it must be quoted.
ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded property
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
Syntax
def get_ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded() -> bytes: ... def set_ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded(value: bytes) -> None: ...
ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded = property(get_ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded, set_ssl_accept_server_cert_encoded)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The store and subject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.
When encoded is set, a search is initiated in the current store for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, subject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, subject is set to an empty string.
ssl_cert_effective_date property
The date on which this certificate becomes valid.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_effective_date() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_effective_date = property(get_ssl_cert_effective_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which this certificate becomes valid. Before this date, it is not valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2000 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_expiration_date property
The date on which the certificate expires.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_expiration_date() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_expiration_date = property(get_ssl_cert_expiration_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which the certificate expires. After this date, the certificate will no longer be valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2001 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_extended_key_usage property
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_extended_key_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_extended_key_usage = property(get_ssl_cert_extended_key_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. These are the same as ASN.1 object identifiers (OIDs).
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_fingerprint property
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_fingerprint() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_fingerprint = property(get_ssl_cert_fingerprint, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: bc:2a:72:af:fe:58:17:43:7a:5f:ba:5a:7c:90:f7:02
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha1 property
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 30:7b:fa:38:65:83:ff:da:b4:4e:07:3f:17:b8:a4:ed:80:be:ff:84
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha256 property
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_cert_fingerprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 6a:80:5c:33:a9:43:ea:b0:96:12:8a:64:96:30:ef:4a:8a:96:86:ce:f4:c7:be:10:24:8e:2b:60:9e:f3:59:53
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_issuer property
The issuer of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_issuer() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_issuer = property(get_ssl_cert_issuer, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The issuer of the certificate. This property contains a string representation of the name of the issuing authority for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_private_key property
The private key of the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_private_key() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_private_key = property(get_ssl_cert_private_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The private key of the certificate (if available). The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
Note: The privatekey may be available but not exportable. In this case, privatekey returns an empty string.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_private_key_available property
Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_private_key_available() -> bool: ...
ssl_cert_private_key_available = property(get_ssl_cert_private_key_available, None)
Default Value
FALSE
Remarks
Whether a privatekey is available for the selected certificate. If privatekeyavailable is True, the certificate may be used for authentication purposes (e.g., server authentication).
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_private_key_container property
The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_private_key_container() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_private_key_container = property(get_ssl_cert_private_key_container, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The name of the privatekey container for the certificate (if available). This functionality is available only on Windows platforms.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_public_key property
The public key of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_public_key() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_public_key = property(get_ssl_cert_public_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The public key of the certificate. The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_public_key_algorithm property
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_public_key_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_public_key_algorithm = property(get_ssl_cert_public_key_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSADH") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_public_key_length property
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits).
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_public_key_length() -> int: ...
ssl_cert_public_key_length = property(get_ssl_cert_public_key_length, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). Common values are 512, 1024, and 2048.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_serial_number property
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_serial_number() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_serial_number = property(get_ssl_cert_serial_number, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. The number is encoded as a series of hexadecimal digits, with each pair representing a byte of the serial number.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_signature_algorithm property
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_signature_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_signature_algorithm = property(get_ssl_cert_signature_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSAMD5RSA") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_store property
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_store() -> bytes: ... def set_ssl_cert_store(value: bytes) -> None: ...
ssl_cert_store = property(get_ssl_cert_store, set_ssl_cert_store)
Default Value
"MY"
Remarks
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
The storetype property denotes the type of the certificate store specified by store. If the store is password-protected, specify the password in storepassword.
store is used in conjunction with the subject property to specify client certificates. If store has a value, and subject or encoded is set, a search for a certificate is initiated. Please see the subject property for details.
Designations of certificate stores are platform dependent.
The following designations are the most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows:
MY | A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys. |
CA | Certifying authority certificates. |
ROOT | Root certificates. |
When the certificate store type is cstPFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file. When the type is cstPFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e., PKCS#12 certificate store).
ssl_cert_store_password property
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_store_password() -> str: ... def set_ssl_cert_store_password(value: str) -> None: ...
ssl_cert_store_password = property(get_ssl_cert_store_password, set_ssl_cert_store_password)
Default Value
""
Remarks
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
ssl_cert_store_type property
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_store_type() -> int: ... def set_ssl_cert_store_type(value: int) -> None: ...
ssl_cert_store_type = property(get_ssl_cert_store_type, set_ssl_cert_store_type)
Possible Values
0 # User
1 # Machine
2 # PFXFile
3 # PFXBlob
4 # JKSFile
5 # JKSBlob
6 # PEMKeyFile
7 # PEMKeyBlob
8 # PublicKeyFile
9 # PublicKeyBlob
10 # SSHPublicKeyBlob
11 # P7BFile
12 # P7BBlob
13 # SSHPublicKeyFile
14 # PPKFile
15 # PPKBlob
16 # XMLFile
17 # XMLBlob
18 # JWKFile
19 # JWKBlob
20 # SecurityKey
21 # BCFKSFile
22 # BCFKSBlob
23 # PKCS11
99 # Auto
Default Value
0
Remarks
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
The class supports both public and private keys in a variety of formats. When the cstAuto value is used, the class will automatically determine the type. This property can take one of the following values:
0 (cstUser - default) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
1 (cstMachine) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a machine store.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
2 (cstPFXFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PFX (PKCS#12) file containing certificates. |
3 (cstPFXBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS#12) format. |
4 (cstJKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a Java Key Store (JKS) file containing certificates.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
5 (cstJKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java Key Store (JKS) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
6 (cstPEMKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
7 (cstPEMKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
8 (cstPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
9 (cstPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
10 (cstSSHPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key. |
11 (cstP7BFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PKCS#7 file containing certificates. |
12 (cstP7BBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) representing a certificate store in PKCS#7 format. |
13 (cstSSHPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains an SSH-style public key. |
14 (cstPPKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
15 (cstPPKBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
16 (cstXMLFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a certificate in XML format. |
17 (cstXMLBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a certificate in XML format. |
18 (cstJWKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
19 (cstJWKBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
21 (cstBCFKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store).
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
22 (cstBCFKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
23 (cstPKCS11) | The certificate is present on a physical security key accessible via a PKCS#11 interface.
To use a security key, the necessary data must first be collected using the CertMgr class. The liststorecertificates method may be called after setting certstoretype to cstPKCS11, certstorepassword to the PIN, and certstore to the full path of the PKCS#11 DLL. The certificate information returned in the oncertlist event's CertEncoded parameter may be saved for later use. When using a certificate, pass the previously saved security key information as the store and set storepassword to the PIN. Code Example. SSH Authentication with Security Key:
|
99 (cstAuto) | The store type is automatically detected from the input data. This setting may be used with both public and private keys and can detect any of the supported formats automatically. |
ssl_cert_subject_alt_names property
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_subject_alt_names() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_subject_alt_names = property(get_ssl_cert_subject_alt_names, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_thumbprint_md5 property
The MD5 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_md5() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_thumbprint_md5 = property(get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_md5, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The MD5 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha1 property
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha256 property
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_cert_thumbprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_usage property
The text description of UsageFlags .
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_usage = property(get_ssl_cert_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of usageflags.
This value will be one or more of the following strings and will be separated by commas:
- Digital Signature
- Non-Repudiation
- Key Encipherment
- Data Encipherment
- Key Agreement
- Certificate Signing
- CRL Signing
- Encipher Only
If the provider is OpenSSL, the value is a comma-separated list of X.509 certificate extension names.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_usage_flags property
The flags that show intended use for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_usage_flags() -> int: ...
ssl_cert_usage_flags = property(get_ssl_cert_usage_flags, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The flags that show intended use for the certificate. The value of usageflags is a combination of the following flags:
0x80 | Digital Signature |
0x40 | Non-Repudiation |
0x20 | Key Encipherment |
0x10 | Data Encipherment |
0x08 | Key Agreement |
0x04 | Certificate Signing |
0x02 | CRL Signing |
0x01 | Encipher Only |
Please see the usage property for a text representation of usageflags.
This functionality currently is not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_version property
The certificate's version number.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_version() -> str: ...
ssl_cert_version = property(get_ssl_cert_version, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate's version number. The possible values are the strings "V1", "V2", and "V3".
This property is read-only.
ssl_cert_subject property
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_subject() -> str: ... def set_ssl_cert_subject(value: str) -> None: ...
ssl_cert_subject = property(get_ssl_cert_subject, set_ssl_cert_subject)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
This property must be set after all other certificate properties are set. When this property is set, a search is performed in the current certificate store to locate a certificate with a matching subject.
If a matching certificate is found, the property is set to the full subject of the matching certificate.
If an exact match is not found, the store is searched for subjects containing the value of the property.
If a match is still not found, the property is set to an empty string, and no certificate is selected.
The special value "*" picks a random certificate in the certificate store.
The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For instance, "CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=example@email.com". Common fields and their meanings are as follows:
Field | Meaning |
CN | Common Name. This is commonly a hostname like www.server.com. |
O | Organization |
OU | Organizational Unit |
L | Locality |
S | State |
C | Country |
E | Email Address |
If a field value contains a comma, it must be quoted.
ssl_cert_encoded property
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
Syntax
def get_ssl_cert_encoded() -> bytes: ... def set_ssl_cert_encoded(value: bytes) -> None: ...
ssl_cert_encoded = property(get_ssl_cert_encoded, set_ssl_cert_encoded)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The store and subject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.
When encoded is set, a search is initiated in the current store for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, subject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, subject is set to an empty string.
ssl_provider property
The Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) implementation to use.
Syntax
def get_ssl_provider() -> int: ... def set_ssl_provider(value: int) -> None: ...
ssl_provider = property(get_ssl_provider, set_ssl_provider)
Possible Values
0 # Automatic
1 # Platform
2 # Internal
Default Value
0
Remarks
This property specifies the SSL/TLS implementation to use. In most cases the default value of 0 (Automatic) is recommended and should not be changed. When set to 0 (Automatic), the class will select whether to use the platform implementation or the internal implementation depending on the operating system as well as the TLS version being used.
Possible values are as follows:
0 (sslpAutomatic - default) | Automatically selects the appropriate implementation. |
1 (sslpPlatform) | Uses the platform/system implementation. |
2 (sslpInternal) | Uses the internal implementation. |
In most cases using the default value (Automatic) is recommended. The class will select a provider depending on the current platform.
When Automatic is selected, on Windows, the class will use the platform implementation. On Linux/macOS, the class will use the internal implementation. When TLS 1.3 is enabled via SSLEnabledProtocols, the internal implementation is used on all platforms.
ssl_server_cert_effective_date property
The date on which this certificate becomes valid.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_effective_date() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_effective_date = property(get_ssl_server_cert_effective_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which this certificate becomes valid. Before this date, it is not valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2000 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_expiration_date property
The date on which the certificate expires.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_expiration_date() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_expiration_date = property(get_ssl_server_cert_expiration_date, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The date on which the certificate expires. After this date, the certificate will no longer be valid. The date is localized to the system's time zone. The following example illustrates the format of an encoded date:
23-Jan-2001 15:00:00.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_extended_key_usage property
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_extended_key_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_extended_key_usage = property(get_ssl_server_cert_extended_key_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
A comma-delimited list of extended key usage identifiers. These are the same as ASN.1 object identifiers (OIDs).
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint property
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint = property(get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 16-byte MD5 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: bc:2a:72:af:fe:58:17:43:7a:5f:ba:5a:7c:90:f7:02
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 property
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 20-byte SHA-1 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 30:7b:fa:38:65:83:ff:da:b4:4e:07:3f:17:b8:a4:ed:80:be:ff:84
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 property
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_server_cert_fingerprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The hex-encoded, 32-byte SHA-256 fingerprint of the certificate. This property is primarily used for keys which do not have a corresponding X.509 public certificate, such as PEM keys that only contain a private key. It is commonly used for SSH keys.
The following example illustrates the format: 6a:80:5c:33:a9:43:ea:b0:96:12:8a:64:96:30:ef:4a:8a:96:86:ce:f4:c7:be:10:24:8e:2b:60:9e:f3:59:53
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_issuer property
The issuer of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_issuer() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_issuer = property(get_ssl_server_cert_issuer, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The issuer of the certificate. This property contains a string representation of the name of the issuing authority for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_private_key property
The private key of the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_private_key() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_private_key = property(get_ssl_server_cert_private_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The private key of the certificate (if available). The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
Note: The privatekey may be available but not exportable. In this case, privatekey returns an empty string.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_private_key_available property
Whether a PrivateKey is available for the selected certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_private_key_available() -> bool: ...
ssl_server_cert_private_key_available = property(get_ssl_server_cert_private_key_available, None)
Default Value
FALSE
Remarks
Whether a privatekey is available for the selected certificate. If privatekeyavailable is True, the certificate may be used for authentication purposes (e.g., server authentication).
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_private_key_container property
The name of the PrivateKey container for the certificate (if available).
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_private_key_container() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_private_key_container = property(get_ssl_server_cert_private_key_container, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The name of the privatekey container for the certificate (if available). This functionality is available only on Windows platforms.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_public_key property
The public key of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_public_key() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_public_key = property(get_ssl_server_cert_public_key, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The public key of the certificate. The key is provided as PEM/Base64-encoded data.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_public_key_algorithm property
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_public_key_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_public_key_algorithm = property(get_ssl_server_cert_public_key_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The textual description of the certificate's public key algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSADH") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_public_key_length property
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits).
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_public_key_length() -> int: ...
ssl_server_cert_public_key_length = property(get_ssl_server_cert_public_key_length, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The length of the certificate's public key (in bits). Common values are 512, 1024, and 2048.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_serial_number property
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_serial_number() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_serial_number = property(get_ssl_server_cert_serial_number, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The serial number of the certificate encoded as a string. The number is encoded as a series of hexadecimal digits, with each pair representing a byte of the serial number.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_signature_algorithm property
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_signature_algorithm() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_signature_algorithm = property(get_ssl_server_cert_signature_algorithm, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of the certificate's signature algorithm. The property contains either the name of the algorithm (e.g., "RSA" or "RSAMD5RSA") or an object identifier (OID) string representing the algorithm.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_store property
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_store() -> bytes: ...
ssl_server_cert_store = property(get_ssl_server_cert_store, None)
Default Value
"MY"
Remarks
The name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
The storetype property denotes the type of the certificate store specified by store. If the store is password-protected, specify the password in storepassword.
store is used in conjunction with the subject property to specify client certificates. If store has a value, and subject or encoded is set, a search for a certificate is initiated. Please see the subject property for details.
Designations of certificate stores are platform dependent.
The following designations are the most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows:
MY | A certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys. |
CA | Certifying authority certificates. |
ROOT | Root certificates. |
When the certificate store type is cstPFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file. When the type is cstPFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e., PKCS#12 certificate store).
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_store_password property
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_store_password() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_store_password = property(get_ssl_server_cert_store_password, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_store_type property
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_store_type() -> int: ...
ssl_server_cert_store_type = property(get_ssl_server_cert_store_type, None)
Possible Values
0 # User
1 # Machine
2 # PFXFile
3 # PFXBlob
4 # JKSFile
5 # JKSBlob
6 # PEMKeyFile
7 # PEMKeyBlob
8 # PublicKeyFile
9 # PublicKeyBlob
10 # SSHPublicKeyBlob
11 # P7BFile
12 # P7BBlob
13 # SSHPublicKeyFile
14 # PPKFile
15 # PPKBlob
16 # XMLFile
17 # XMLBlob
18 # JWKFile
19 # JWKBlob
20 # SecurityKey
21 # BCFKSFile
22 # BCFKSBlob
23 # PKCS11
99 # Auto
Default Value
0
Remarks
The type of certificate store for this certificate.
The class supports both public and private keys in a variety of formats. When the cstAuto value is used, the class will automatically determine the type. This property can take one of the following values:
0 (cstUser - default) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
1 (cstMachine) | For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a machine store.
Note: This store type is not available in Java. |
2 (cstPFXFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PFX (PKCS#12) file containing certificates. |
3 (cstPFXBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS#12) format. |
4 (cstJKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a Java Key Store (JKS) file containing certificates.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
5 (cstJKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java Key Store (JKS) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java. |
6 (cstPEMKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
7 (cstPEMKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate. |
8 (cstPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
9 (cstPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate. |
10 (cstSSHPublicKeyBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key. |
11 (cstP7BFile) | The certificate store is the name of a PKCS#7 file containing certificates. |
12 (cstP7BBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) representing a certificate store in PKCS#7 format. |
13 (cstSSHPublicKeyFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains an SSH-style public key. |
14 (cstPPKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
15 (cstPPKBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary) that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key). |
16 (cstXMLFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a certificate in XML format. |
17 (cstXMLBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a certificate in XML format. |
18 (cstJWKFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
19 (cstJWKBlob) | The certificate store is a string that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key). |
21 (cstBCFKSFile) | The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store).
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
22 (cstBCFKSBlob) | The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store) format.
Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET. |
23 (cstPKCS11) | The certificate is present on a physical security key accessible via a PKCS#11 interface.
To use a security key, the necessary data must first be collected using the CertMgr class. The liststorecertificates method may be called after setting certstoretype to cstPKCS11, certstorepassword to the PIN, and certstore to the full path of the PKCS#11 DLL. The certificate information returned in the oncertlist event's CertEncoded parameter may be saved for later use. When using a certificate, pass the previously saved security key information as the store and set storepassword to the PIN. Code Example. SSH Authentication with Security Key:
|
99 (cstAuto) | The store type is automatically detected from the input data. This setting may be used with both public and private keys and can detect any of the supported formats automatically. |
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_subject_alt_names property
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_subject_alt_names() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_subject_alt_names = property(get_ssl_server_cert_subject_alt_names, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
Comma-separated lists of alternative subject names for the certificate.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 property
The MD5 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_md5() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_md5 = property(get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_md5, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The MD5 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 property
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1 = property(get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha1, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-1 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 property
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256 = property(get_ssl_server_cert_thumbprint_sha256, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The SHA-256 hash of the certificate. It is primarily used for X.509 certificates. If the hash does not already exist, it is automatically computed.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_usage property
The text description of UsageFlags .
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_usage() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_usage = property(get_ssl_server_cert_usage, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The text description of usageflags.
This value will be one or more of the following strings and will be separated by commas:
- Digital Signature
- Non-Repudiation
- Key Encipherment
- Data Encipherment
- Key Agreement
- Certificate Signing
- CRL Signing
- Encipher Only
If the provider is OpenSSL, the value is a comma-separated list of X.509 certificate extension names.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_usage_flags property
The flags that show intended use for the certificate.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_usage_flags() -> int: ...
ssl_server_cert_usage_flags = property(get_ssl_server_cert_usage_flags, None)
Default Value
0
Remarks
The flags that show intended use for the certificate. The value of usageflags is a combination of the following flags:
0x80 | Digital Signature |
0x40 | Non-Repudiation |
0x20 | Key Encipherment |
0x10 | Data Encipherment |
0x08 | Key Agreement |
0x04 | Certificate Signing |
0x02 | CRL Signing |
0x01 | Encipher Only |
Please see the usage property for a text representation of usageflags.
This functionality currently is not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_version property
The certificate's version number.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_version() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_version = property(get_ssl_server_cert_version, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate's version number. The possible values are the strings "V1", "V2", and "V3".
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_subject property
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_subject() -> str: ...
ssl_server_cert_subject = property(get_ssl_server_cert_subject, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
This property must be set after all other certificate properties are set. When this property is set, a search is performed in the current certificate store to locate a certificate with a matching subject.
If a matching certificate is found, the property is set to the full subject of the matching certificate.
If an exact match is not found, the store is searched for subjects containing the value of the property.
If a match is still not found, the property is set to an empty string, and no certificate is selected.
The special value "*" picks a random certificate in the certificate store.
The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For instance, "CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=example@email.com". Common fields and their meanings are as follows:
Field | Meaning |
CN | Common Name. This is commonly a hostname like www.server.com. |
O | Organization |
OU | Organizational Unit |
L | Locality |
S | State |
C | Country |
E | Email Address |
If a field value contains a comma, it must be quoted.
This property is read-only.
ssl_server_cert_encoded property
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
Syntax
def get_ssl_server_cert_encoded() -> bytes: ...
ssl_server_cert_encoded = property(get_ssl_server_cert_encoded, None)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The store and subject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.
When encoded is set, a search is initiated in the current store for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, subject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, subject is set to an empty string.
This property is read-only.
stan property
The merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN).
Syntax
def get_stan() -> str: ... def set_stan(value: str) -> None: ...
stan = property(get_stan, set_stan)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property represents a six digit number assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference the transaction. This number must be unique within a day per Merchant ID and Terminal ID.
Valid values are from 000001 to 999999 inclusive.
timeout property
A timeout for the class.
Syntax
def get_timeout() -> int: ... def set_timeout(value: int) -> None: ...
timeout = property(get_timeout, set_timeout)
Default Value
30
Remarks
If timeout is set to a positive value, and an operation cannot be completed immediately, the class will return with an error after timeout seconds.
The default value for timeout is 30 (seconds).
tppid property
Third Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS.
Syntax
def get_tppid() -> str: ... def set_tppid(value: str) -> None: ...
tppid = property(get_tppid, set_tppid)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The Third Party Processor Identifier (TPPID. Also sometimes referred to as a "Vendor Id") is assigned by FDMS to each third party who is processing transactions. Each merchant will receive a TPPID from FDMS.
The default value is "" (empty string). This should be set to the FDMS assigned TPPID.
A visa_identifier is also required for Visa transactions.
transaction_amount property
The transaction amount to be authorized.
Syntax
def get_transaction_amount() -> str: ... def set_transaction_amount(value: str) -> None: ...
transaction_amount = property(get_transaction_amount, set_transaction_amount)
Default Value
""
Remarks
This property contains the transaction amount to be authorized.
This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.
The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.
transaction_number property
Uniquely identifies the transaction.
Syntax
def get_transaction_number() -> str: ... def set_transaction_number(value: str) -> None: ...
transaction_number = property(get_transaction_number, set_transaction_number)
Default Value
""
Remarks
The TransactionNumber (otherwise known as the Client Reference Number, or ClientRef) uniquely identifies the packet sent by the application to the Datawire system. This parameter stores some unique token of information, and is used to match the response to the initial request sent. For example, the client application could use a static counter that is increased with the each executed request.
For all classs except FDMSGiftCard the maximum length of this property is 14 alphanumeric characters.
The FDMS recommended format is "tttttttVnnnnrrr" where ttttttt is a 7 digit transaction id, V is a constant, and nnn is a 3 digit version number and rrr is a 3 digit revision number. The 6 digit version number is typically static but unique for an application (Example: Version 2.5 = tttttttV002500).
For the Rapid Connect platform, the 6 character version number should be your Project/TPPID value. The entire TransactionNumber must be unique within a 24 hour time period.
The FDMSGiftCard also passes this value to the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system as a transaction id, and therefore the following restrictions are enforced: The maximum length is 7 characters. If the first character is an 'X', the remaining characters must be in the range '0' through 'F', indicating a hexadecimal number. Otherwise the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system only allows digits in this property.
url property
Location of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent.
Syntax
def get_url() -> str: ... def set_url(value: str) -> None: ...
url = property(get_url, set_url)
Default Value
"https://staging1.datawire.net/sd/"
Remarks
This is the URL to which all authorization and settlement transactions are sent. This URL is acquired by using the FDMSRegister class. Once you Register and Activate the merchant using the FDMSRegister class, you may then do a Service Discovery. After sending a Service Discovery transaction, the Datawire system will return a list of transaction URLs. The URL from this list with the shortest round-trip transit time from a ping is the URL you should use here.
Note: By default, this property is populated with the Datawire Staging (test) server, and is not the correct URL to use in a production environment. In a production environment, this URL is supplied by the FDMSRegister class.
visa_identifier property
Additional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions.
Syntax
def get_visa_identifier() -> str: ... def set_visa_identifier(value: str) -> None: ...
visa_identifier = property(get_visa_identifier, set_visa_identifier)
Default Value
""
Remarks
First Data will require the Agent Identification Service from all Third Party Servicers (TPS) or Merchant Servicers (MS). Each Visa Agent Identifier in the chain is composed of the following pieces:
First (up to) 10 bytes: | The Business Identifier (BID) provided by Visa to Third Party Servicers (TPS). This value may be less than 10 bytes. |
Final 12 bytes: | Text representation of the hexadecimal Visa secret Agent Unique Account Result (AUAR). {0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0xFF} will be represented as "0102030405FF". |
A VisaIdentifier (Agent Identification Service - AUAR) is required for Visa transactions. A VisaIdentifier value is assigned by Visa as part of their Trusted Agent Program (TAP). Therefore it is suggested that you contact your FDMS certification analyst as they should be able to provide you with further information and put you in contact with the required party at Visa. Unfortunately more specific information on this matter cannot be provided as we do not handle live customer data and thus are not required to register in this particular program. However below is some additional information in regards to the requirements of a Visa Identifier.
Any merchant that transmits, processes, or stores cardholder data on server(s) that you own, manage, or operate on behalf of your clients (who are other merchant account holders) must meet the PCI Data Security Standard and follow additional steps to register as a service provider. Applicable services commonly include webhosting, software as a service, or collecting payment on behalf of a client. Any company providing these services must register with Visa's Third Party Agent (TAP) program.
You can register for the Visa Third Party Agent Program at http://usa.visa.com/merchants/risk_management/third-party-registration.html
If you find that you are not required to register with this program you can send all spaces for the BID and all zeros for the AUAR for instance:
" 000000000000"
balance_inquiry method
Performs a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data.
Syntax
def balance_inquiry() -> None: ...
Remarks
This methods allows you to perform a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified card data. The balance amount will be returned via response_balance. Note that Balance Inquiries do not place a hold on a cardholder's funds and are not captured.
config method
Sets or retrieves a configuration setting.
Syntax
def config(configuration_string: str) -> str: ...
Remarks
config is a generic method available in every class. It is used to set and retrieve configuration settings for the class.
These settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the config method.
To set a configuration setting named PROPERTY, you must call Config("PROPERTY=VALUE"), where VALUE is the value of the setting expressed as a string. For boolean values, use the strings "True", "False", "0", "1", "Yes", or "No" (case does not matter).
To read (query) the value of a configuration setting, you must call Config("PROPERTY"). The value will be returned as a string.
credit method
Submits a credit transaction.
Syntax
def credit() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method credits funds to the card. This is not based on a previous transaction. This may be used to return funds to a card if a previous transaction has already been settled. To void or cancel a transaction before it has been settled call reverse instead.
After this method returns check the value of response_code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the url property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's service_discovery method).
Debit Credit Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200";
debit.Credit();
get_detail_aggregate method
Returns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode.
Syntax
def get_detail_aggregate() -> str: ...
Remarks
This method will return a detail aggregate representing the transaction. After calling auth_only or sale call this method to obtain a detail aggregate. The aggregate will be required when calling capture or reverse.
When using Terminal Capture Settlement Mode this aggregate must be passed to the FDMSRcSettle class's DetailAggregate array property in order to settle the transaction. If you wish to view or change any part of the aggregate (such as adding a gratuity or additional info for an Installment payment), you may use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to do so.
Note: This method may only be called after a successful authorization. If the authorization was not successful the method fails with an error.
To set the aggregate before calling capture reverse or send_settlement call set_detail_aggregate. Save this aggregate in a secure location.
host_totals method
Performs a Host Totals request.
Syntax
def host_totals() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method performs a Host Totals transaction submitted to request a Host Totals Report for a particular day.
You need to set the required merchant password and report type fields using the HostTotalsPassword and HostTotalsType configuration settings, respectively.
Debit HostTotals Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.Config("CurrencyCode=840");
debit.Config("HostTotalsType=0");
debit.Config("HostTotalsPassword=111111");
debit.HostTotals();
interrupt method
Interrupts the current action.
Syntax
def interrupt() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method interrupts any processing that the class is currently executing.
reset method
Clears all properties to their default values.
Syntax
def reset() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method clears all properties to their default values.
reverse method
Reverses a transaction.
Syntax
def reverse() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method reverses a transaction that has not been settled.
To void/reverse a sale or auth_only transaction first set reversal_transaction_type to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set reversal_type to frtFullReversal and call this method.
If the previous transaction did not receive a response and the state of the transaction is uncertain you may perform a Timeout Reversal. To perform a timeout reversal set reversal_transaction_type to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set reversal_type to frtTimeoutReversal and call this method.
Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:
- auth_only
- sale
After this method returns check the value of response_code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the url property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's service_discovery method).
Debit Sale and Reverse Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200";
debit.Sale();
//Store the aggregate for use later
string aggregate = debit.GetDetailAggregate();
//Later, reverse the transaction
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "113";
debit.TransactionNumber = "120014";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "123457";
debit.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate);
debit.ReversalTransactionType = FdmsrcdebitReversalTransactionTypes.frttSale;
debit.ReversalType = FdmsrcdebitReversalTypes.fdrtFullReversal;
debit.Reverse();
sale method
Performs a sale transaction.
Syntax
def sale() -> None: ...
Remarks
This method performs a sale transaction. Once a sale is performed no further action is needed, the funds will automatically be captured by FDMS.
After this method returns check the value of response_code to determine if the transaction was successful.
Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the url property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's service_discovery method).
Debit Sale Example
debit.TPPID = "AAA000";
debit.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001";
debit.MerchantId = "1234";
debit.GroupId = "20001";
debit.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566";
debit.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";
debit.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc";
debit.STAN = "112";
debit.TransactionNumber = "1234";
debit.ReferenceNumber = "1212";
debit.OrderNumber = "123";
debit.Card.MagneticStripe = "4003010001234572=17041011234567440";
debit.EncryptedPIN = "7BD8948B328B21E5";
debit.KSN = "876543210F008400029";
debit.TransactionAmount = "1200";
debit.Sale();
set_detail_aggregate method
Specifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse.
Syntax
def set_detail_aggregate(aggregate: str) -> None: ...
Remarks
This method specifies the detail aggregate from the original auth_only or sale transaction. This must be set before calling capture or reverse.
The aggregate specified here should have been obtained from the get_detail_aggregate method after the original auth_only or sale transaction.
on_connected event
Fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails).
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitConnectedEventParams(object): @property def status_code() -> int: ... @property def description() -> str: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_connected() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitConnectedEventParams], None]: ... @on_connected.setter def on_connected(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitConnectedEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
If the connection is made normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".
If the connection fails, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the error.
Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.
on_data_packet_in event
Fired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitDataPacketInEventParams(object): @property def data_packet() -> bytes: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_data_packet_in() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDataPacketInEventParams], None]: ... @on_data_packet_in.setter def on_data_packet_in(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDataPacketInEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
This event fires when a packet is received. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or to extract additional response properties beyond the scope of this class.
on_data_packet_out event
Fired when sending a data packet to the transaction server.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitDataPacketOutEventParams(object): @property def data_packet() -> bytes: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_data_packet_out() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDataPacketOutEventParams], None]: ... @on_data_packet_out.setter def on_data_packet_out(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDataPacketOutEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
This event fires right before each data packet is sent. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or may be modified to support additional features beyond the scope of this class.
on_disconnected event
Fired when a connection is closed.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitDisconnectedEventParams(object): @property def status_code() -> int: ... @property def description() -> str: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_disconnected() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDisconnectedEventParams], None]: ... @on_disconnected.setter def on_disconnected(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitDisconnectedEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
If the connection is broken normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".
If the connection is broken for any other reason, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP/IP) subsystem. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the TCP/IP error.
Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.
on_error event
Fired when information is available about errors during data delivery.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitErrorEventParams(object): @property def error_code() -> int: ... @property def description() -> str: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_error() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitErrorEventParams], None]: ... @on_error.setter def on_error(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitErrorEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
The on_error event is fired in case of exceptional conditions during message processing. Normally the class fails with an error.
The ErrorCode parameter contains an error code, and the Description parameter contains a textual description of the error. For a list of valid error codes and their descriptions, please refer to the Error Codes section.
on_ssl_server_authentication event
Fired after the server presents its certificate to the client.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams(object): @property def cert_encoded() -> bytes: ... @property def cert_subject() -> str: ... @property def cert_issuer() -> str: ... @property def status() -> str: ... @property def accept() -> bool: ... @accept.setter def accept(value) -> None: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_ssl_server_authentication() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams], None]: ... @on_ssl_server_authentication.setter def on_ssl_server_authentication(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
During this event, the client can decide whether or not to continue with the connection process. The Accept parameter is a recommendation on whether to continue or close the connection. This is just a suggestion: application software must use its own logic to determine whether or not to continue.
When Accept is False, Status shows why the verification failed (otherwise, Status contains the string OK). If it is decided to continue, you can override and accept the certificate by setting the Accept parameter to True.
on_ssl_status event
Fired when secure connection progress messages are available.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitSSLStatusEventParams(object): @property def message() -> str: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_ssl_status() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitSSLStatusEventParams], None]: ... @on_ssl_status.setter def on_ssl_status(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitSSLStatusEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. This event tracks the progress of the connection.
on_status event
Shows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection.
Syntax
class FDMSRcDebitStatusEventParams(object): @property def message() -> str: ... # In class FDMSRcDebit: @property def on_status() -> Callable[[FDMSRcDebitStatusEventParams], None]: ... @on_status.setter def on_status(event_hook: Callable[[FDMSRcDebitStatusEventParams], None]) -> None: ...
Remarks
The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. Used to track the progress of the connection.
FDMSRcDebit Config Settings
The class accepts one or more of the following configuration settings. Configuration settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the config method.FDMSRcDebit Config Settings
This setting specifies whether partial authorizations are supported. Partial authorization support is generally required for all merchants in card-present environments. The merchant may be subject to fees, interchange downgrades, or both if this is not supported in a retail environment. Support for partial authorizations is optional in ECommerce transactions but is highly recommended. The default value is True.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant address to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 25 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant city to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 20 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant country code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the ISO 3166 three digit numeric identifier.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant email address be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 40 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant name to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 30 characters in length.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant state to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the two characters state abbreviation.
This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant zip code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 9 characters in length.
Possible values are:
1 | Re-authorization (Visa and Discover only) |
2 | Resubmission (Visa and Discover only) |
3 | Estimated Authorization (Visa only) |
4 | Credential on File (Visa, Discover, Amex, and Mastercard only) |
This setting indicates whether the authorized amount is equal to the final captured amount. This is a mandatory MasterCard only field. The list of valid values is:
0 | Preauthorization - The Settlement amount may be different than the amount authorized. |
1 | Final Authorization -The settlement amount must equal the approved authorized amount. |
Note: When this field is set to '1' in the original transaction, you cannot send a Partial Reversal subsequent transaction. Set the AuthorizationIndicator to '0' when the settlement amount may be different than the approved amount authorized.
This setting may be queried after a transaction to determine the source of the decision. This is only applicable to Visa transactions. Possible values are:
0 | Timeout - Response Provided by STIP, Timed Out by Switch |
1 | Visa Stand-In Processing - Response Provided by STIP, Transaction Amount was Below Issuer Limit or Below Sliding Dollar Amount |
2 | Suppress Inquiry Mode - Response Provided by STIP, Issuer is in Suppress Inquiry (SI) Mode |
3 | Issuer Unavailable - Response Provided by STIP for One of the Following Reasons: Issuer was Not Available for Processing (for reasons other than being in SI Mode) or CCV or iCCV was Invalid and Visa has Acted on the Negative Results |
4 | Issuer - Response Provided by Issuer |
This setting optionally specifies the method used to input the card number or track data. If not specified (default) the class will automatically determine the correct value based on card_entry_data_source. This should only be set if there is a need to override the automatically determined value. Possible values are:
00 | Unspecified |
01 | Manual (Key entered) |
03 | Barcode |
04 | OCR (Optical Character Reader) |
05 | Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data Reliable) |
07 | Contactless Integrated Circuit Read (Reliable) |
08 | AMEX Digital Wallet |
09 | MasterCard remote chip entry |
10 | Credential on File |
79 | EMV fallback to manual entry |
80 | EMV fallback to Magnetic Stripe entry |
82 | Contactless Mobile Commerce |
86 | EMV Transaction switched from Contactless to Contact entry |
90 | Magnetic Stripe - Track Read |
91 | Contactless Magnetic Stripe Read |
95 | Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data unreliable) |
By default the class will automatically determine the card type and submit the card type information in the transaction request. This setting may be set to override the automatically determined value and manually specify the type of card.
This should not be set unless there is a specific reason to do so.
Possible values are:
0 | Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known |
1 | Visa |
2 | MasterCard |
3 | American Express |
4 | Discover |
5 | Diners |
6 | JCB |
7 | Visa Electron |
8 | Maestro |
9 | China Union Pay |
This setting indicates the interval of time, in seconds, a client will wait for the response for any given request. Normally this value is set to a value 5 seconds less than the timeout value to allow for a response to be received from Datawire. It may be changed independently by setting this configuration setting AFTER setting the timeout property. Note that too small a value will cause Datawire to reject a transaction immediately.
This field contains a three digit number assigned by the signing member or processor to identify the merchant's authorization currency. For US Dollars, use "840".
If set to True the on_status event will fire with the raw request and response information. This is helpful for debugging.
This setting is required for contactless MasterCard transactions when CardInputMode is set to 07, 82, or 91. Possible values are:
0 | Card |
1 | Mobile Network Operator (MNO) controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone |
2 | Key Fob |
3 | Watch |
4 | Mobile Tag |
5 | Wristband |
6 | Mobile Phone Case or Sleeve |
7 | Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non-removable) secure element controlled by the MNO, for example, code division multiple accesses (CDMA). |
8 | Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, memory card personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone. |
9 | Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO. |
10 | MNO controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Tablet or E-Book reader. |
11 | Tablet or E-Book reader with a fixed (non- removable) secure element controlled by the MNO. |
12 | Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, (SD Card) personalized for use with a Tablet or E- Book reader. |
13 | Tablet or E-Book with fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO |
This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorToken for a specified card. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS. In particular, this method is used when performing a Credit or Force using a TransArmorMode of '0' (Tokenization Only) or '1' (Encryption and Tokenization). So prior to adding the needed detail record to the FDMSSettle component, you will first retrieve a TransArmorToken by calling GetTransArmorToken for the card that you wish to use. The received TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will then be set within the detail record (instead of the card data) and can be added to the FDMSSettle component.
This setting specifies the merchant password required in Host Totals requests.
This setting specifies the type of Host Totals Report requested. Possible values are:
0 (default) | Close Batch Report |
1 | Previous Day Report |
This setting indicates an authorization transaction which occurs when a merchant captures transaction information while the connectivity is interrupted or unavailable. This indicator is sent in the authorization transaction once the connection is back online.
Note: This field has limited platform availability. For more information, please contact your Account Representative.
The default value is False
Set this config to True when sending an online purchase return authorization request.
This setting may be set to specify the local datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";
This setting optionally specifies the industry standard 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC). This classifies the business based on the type of goods or services it provides.
The Account Number of the Payee (Biller). The maximum length of this value is 25 characters.
This setting is only applicable to bill payment transactions.
This settings contains the Payee Id for the data being submitted for processing. On a Sale transaction this setting contains Payee (Biller) information. On a credit transaction this setting contains the cardholder's name. That maximum length of this value is 40 characters.
This setting is only applicable to bill payment transactions.
The Phone Number of the Payee (Biller). The value is a 10 digit value.
This setting is only applicable to bill payment transactions.
This setting may be set to specify a different POS condition code. The class will automatically set this to an appropriate value, however this may be set to provide a specific value. Possible values are:
00 | Cardholder Present, Card Present |
01 | Cardholder Present, Unspecified |
02 | Cardholder Present, Unattended Device |
03 | Cardholder Present, Suspect Fraud |
04 | Cardholder Not Present - Recurring |
05 | Cardholder Present, Card Not Present |
06 | Cardholder Present, Identity Verified |
08 | Cardholder Not Present, Mail Order/Telephone Order |
59 | Cardholder Not Present, Ecommerce |
71 | Cardholder Present, Magnetic Stripe Could Not Be Read |
This may optionally be set to identify the specific point of sale device, for instance a lane number. This may be up to 4 digits in length. This setting is only applicable when industry_type is set to Retail.
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to capture card information. Possible values are:
0 | Terminal has no capture capability or no terminal used |
1 | Terminal has card capture capability |
Note: If set to 0 track data must not be specified.
This settings defines what entry modes are supported by the terminal. Possible values are:
00 | Unspecified |
01 | Terminal not used |
02 | Magnetic stripe only |
03 | Magnetic stripe and key entry |
04 | Magnetic stripe, key entry, and chip |
05 | Bar code |
06 | Proximity terminal - contactless chip / RFID |
07 | OCR |
08 | Chip only |
09 | Chip and magnetic stripe |
10 | Manual entry only |
11 | Proximity terminal - contactless magnetic stripe |
12 | Hybrid - Magnetic stripe, Integrated Circuit Card Reader, and contactless capabilities |
13 | Terminal does not read card data |
Note: A value of 04, 06, 08, 09, or 12 cannot be specified unless the client is certified and the device is enabled for EMV.
This setting specifies the terminal's location. The class will automatically set this to the appropriate value depending on the industry_type, however this may be set according to your needs to one of the following possible values:
0 | On Premises; Used in a Card Present environment |
1 | Off Premises; Used in a Card not Present environment |
Note: For MOTO and eCommerce transactions the value is set to 1 by default.
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to accept PIN entry. Possible values are:
0 | Unspecified |
1 | PIN entry capability |
2 | No PIN entry capability |
3 | PIN Pad Inoperative |
4 | PIN verified by terminal device |
This setting specifies the terminal's ability to prompt for tax when performing a transaction with Level 2 commercial cards. Possible values are:
0 | Terminal is not tax prompt capable |
1 | Terminal is tax prompt capable |
This setting specifies the total transaction amount that was authorized including Incremental Authorizations and Partial Reversals.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the key used to perform the encryption of the card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key. Store this key for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Id of the TransArmorKey used to perform the encryption of the card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key ID. Store this key Id for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).
This setting allows you to specify the type of TransArmor security to be used when authorizing and settling transactions. The available modes are:
0 (default) | TransArmor security is not used. |
1 | TransArmor Encryption and Tokenization. The card data will be encrypted using the specified TransArmorKey in the initial authorization. All subsequent requests (including settlement) will use the returned TransArmorToken. The type of encryption used is RSA and is currently the only supported encryption type. |
2 | TransArmor Tokenization only. The card data will not be encrypted. A TransArmorToken will be returned for the transaction and will be used in all subsequent requests (including settlement). |
Note: Your merchant account must be configured to use TransArmor. The configuration is 'Mode' specific and thus you must inform FDMS which type of TransArmor Security Level you wish to use.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Provider Id returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Provider Id will be returned in the response along with a TransArmorToken. This Provider Id will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) and must be specified along with TransArmorToken.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Token returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Token will be returned in the response. This Token will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) in place of the card_number or card_magnetic_stripe.
This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.
This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.
This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.
This setting allows you to identify whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated. When performing an authorization using TransArmor, it is possible that FDMS will request that you update your TransArmorKey. This setting should be queried after every authorization is performed. If the returned value is "False", no key update is required. If "True" is returned, you should update your key by calling UpdateTransArmorKey after the completion of the function in progress (i.e. authorization). If the key update request was successful, you should update your TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values. If the key update request fails, you can continue using your same TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values until another key update indicator is received.
This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorKey that will be used to perform TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1). When this is set to "true" the class will perform the request immediately. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS.
This setting may be set to specify the UTC datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";
This setting specifies the voice approval code obtained when authenticating the transaction over the phone with the issuer. Set this before calling capture.
HTTP Config Settings
When AllowHTTPCompression is True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the request being sent to the server. By default, this header's value is "gzip, deflate". This configuration setting allows you to change the value of the Accept-Encoding header. Note: The class only supports gzip and deflate decompression algorithms.
This configuration setting enables HTTP compression for receiving data. When set to True (default), the class will accept compressed data. It then will uncompress the data it has received. The class will handle data compressed by both gzip and deflate compression algorithms.
When True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the outgoing request. The value for this header can be controlled by the AcceptEncoding configuration setting. The default value for this header is "gzip, deflate".
The default value is True.
This configuration setting controls whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fall back to HTTP/1.1 when the server does not support HTTP/2. This setting is applicable only when http_version is set to "2.0".
If set to True (default), the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 if the server does not support HTTP/2. If set to False, the class fails with an error if the server does not support HTTP/2.
The default value is True.
This configuration setting determines whether data will be appended when writing to local_file. When set to True, downloaded data will be appended to local_file. This may be used in conjunction with range to resume a failed download. This is applicable only when local_file is set. The default value is False.
If the Authorization property contains a nonempty string, an Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys Authorization information to the server.
This property is provided so that the HTTP class can be extended with other security schemes in addition to the authorization schemes already implemented by the class.
The auth_scheme property defines the authentication scheme used. In the case of HTTP Basic Authentication (default), every time user and password are set, they are Base64 encoded, and the result is put in the authorization property in the form "Basic [encoded-user-password]".
This configuration setting returns the raw number of bytes from the HTTP response data, before the component processes the data, whether it is chunked or compressed. This returns the same value as the on_transfer event, by BytesTransferred.
This is applicable only when UseChunkedEncoding is True. This setting specifies the chunk size in bytes to be used when posting data. The default value is 16384.
If set to True, the body of a PUT or POST request will be compressed into gzip format before sending the request. The "Content-Encoding" header is also added to the outgoing request.
The default value is False.
If set to True, the URL passed to the class will be URL encoded. The default value is False.
This option determines what happens when the server issues a redirect. Normally, the class returns an error if the server responds with an "Object Moved" message. If this property is set to 1 (always), the new url for the object is retrieved automatically every time.
If this property is set to 2 (Same Scheme), the new url is retrieved automatically only if the URL Scheme is the same; otherwise, the class fails with an error.
Note: Following the HTTP specification, unless this option is set to 1 (Always), automatic redirects will be performed only for GET or HEAD requests. Other methods potentially could change the conditions of the initial request and create security vulnerabilities.
Furthermore, if either the new URL server or port are different from the existing one, user and password are also reset to empty, unless this property is set to 1 (Always), in which case the same credentials are used to connect to the new server.
A on_redirect event is fired for every URL the product is redirected to. In the case of automatic redirections, the on_redirect event is a good place to set properties related to the new connection (e.g., new authentication parameters).
The default value is 0 (Never). In this case, redirects are never followed, and the class fails with an error instead.
Following are the valid options:
- 0 - Never
- 1 - Always
- 2 - Same Scheme
The default value is False. If set to True, the class will perform a GET on the new location. Otherwise, it will use the same HTTP method again.
HTTP/2 servers maintain a dynamic table of headers and values seen over the course of a connection. Typically, these headers are inserted into the table through incremental indexing (also known as HPACK, defined in RFC 7541). To tell the component not to use incremental indexing for certain headers, and thus not update the dynamic table, set this configuration option to a comma-delimited list of the header names.
This property specifies the HTTP version used by the class. Possible values are as follows:
- "1.0"
- "1.1" (default)
- "2.0"
- "3.0"
When using HTTP/2 ("2.0") or HTTP/3 ("3.0"), additional restrictions apply. Please see the following notes for details.
HTTP/2 Notes
When using HTTP/2, a secure Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/2 will result in an error.
If the server does not support HTTP/2, the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 instead. This is done to provide compatibility without the need for any additional settings. To see which version was used, check NegotiatedHTTPVersion after calling a method. The AllowHTTPFallback setting controls whether this behavior is allowed (default) or disallowed.
HTTP/3 Notes
HTTP/3 is supported only in .NET and Java.
When using HTTP/3, a secure (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/3 will result in an error.
If this setting contains a nonempty string, an If-Modified-Since HTTP header is added to the request. The value of this header is used to make the HTTP request conditional: if the requested documented has not been modified since the time specified in the field, a copy of the document will not be returned from the server; instead, a 304 (not modified) response will be returned by the server and the component throws an exception
The format of the date value for IfModifiedSince is detailed in the HTTP specs. For example:
Sat, 29 Oct 2017 19:43:31 GMT.
If True, the component will not send the Connection: Close header. The absence of the Connection header indicates to the server that HTTP persistent connections should be used if supported. Note: Not all servers support persistent connections. If False, the connection will be closed immediately after the server response is received.
The default value for KeepAlive is False.
If the Service Principal Name on the Kerberos Domain Controller is not the same as the URL that you are authenticating to, the Service Principal Name should be set here.
This configuration setting controls the level of detail that is logged through the on_log event. Possible values are as follows:
0 (None) | No events are logged. |
1 (Info - default) | Informational events are logged. |
2 (Verbose) | Detailed data are logged. |
3 (Debug) | Debug data are logged. |
The value 1 (Info) logs basic information, including the URL, HTTP version, and status details.
The value 2 (Verbose) logs additional information about the request and response.
The value 3 (Debug) logs the headers and body for both the request and response, as well as additional debug information (if any).
When follow_redirects is set to any value other than frNever, the class will follow redirects until this maximum number of redirect attempts are made. The default value is 20.
This configuration setting may be queried after the request is complete to indicate the HTTP version used. When http_version is set to "2.0" (if the server does not support "2.0"), then the class will fall back to using "1.1" automatically. This setting will indicate which version was used.
This configuration setting can be set to a string of headers to be appended to the HTTP request headers.
The headers must follow the format "header: value" as described in the HTTP specifications. Header lines should be separated by CRLF ("\r\n") .
Use this configuration setting with caution. If this configuration setting contains invalid headers, HTTP requests may fail.
This configuration setting is useful for extending the functionality of the class beyond what is provided.
This is similar to the Authorization configuration setting, but is used for proxy authorization. If this configuration setting contains a nonempty string, a Proxy-Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys proxy Authorization information to the server. If proxy_user and proxy_password are specified, this value is calculated using the algorithm specified by proxy_auth_scheme.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.
This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as sent by the client.
This configuration setting contains the result code of the last response from the server.
This setting contains the first line of the last response from the server. The format of the line will be [HTTP version] [Result Code] [Description].
This configuration setting contains the contents of the last response from the server.
If TransferredDataLimit is set to 0 (default), no limits are imposed. Otherwise, this reflects the maximum number of incoming bytes that can be stored by the class.
This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as received from the server.
This configuration setting returns the full request as sent by the client. For performance reasons, the request is not normally saved. Set this configuration setting to ON before making a request to enable it. Following are examples of this request:
.NET
Http http = new Http();
http.Config("TransferredRequest=on");
http.PostData = "body";
http.Post("http://someserver.com");
Console.WriteLine(http.Config("TransferredRequest"));
C++
HTTP http;
http.Config("TransferredRequest=on");
http.SetPostData("body", 5);
http.Post("http://someserver.com");
printf("%s\r\n", http.Config("TransferredRequest"));
If UseChunkedEncoding is set to True, the class will use HTTP-chunked encoding when posting, if possible. HTTP-chunked encoding allows large files to be sent in chunks instead of all at once. If set to False, the class will not use HTTP-chunked encoding. The default value is False.
Note: Some servers (such as the ASP.NET Development Server) may not support chunked encoding.
This configuration setting specifies whether hostnames containing non-ASCII characters are encoded to internationalized domain names. When set to True, if a hostname contains non-ASCII characters, it is encoded using Punycode to an IDN (internationalized domain name).
The default value is False and the hostname will always be used exactly as specified. Note: The CodePage setting must be set to a value capable of interpreting the specified host name. For instance, to specify UTF-8, set CodePage to 65001. In the C++ Edition for Windows, the *W version of the class must be used. For instance, DNSW or HTTPW.
When using this configuration setting, if True, the component will use the default HTTP client for the platform (URLConnection in Java, WebRequest in .NET, or CFHTTPMessage in Mac/iOS) instead of the internal HTTP implementation. This is important for environments in which direct access to sockets is limited or not allowed (e.g., in the Google AppEngine).
Note: This setting is applicable only to Mac/iOS editions.
This configuration specifies whether the class will attempt to use the Proxy auto-config URL when establishing a connection and proxy_auto_detect is set to True.
When True (default), the class will check for the existence of a Proxy auto-config URL, and if found, will determine the appropriate proxy to use.
This is the value supplied in the HTTP User-Agent header. The default setting is "IPWorks HTTP Component - www.nsoftware.com".
Override the default with the name and version of your software.
TCPClient Config Settings
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Name or IP address of firewall (optional).If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Name or IP address of firewall (optional).If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.
If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.
Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Determines the type of firewall to connect through.Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
Determines the type of firewall to connect through.Possible values are as follows:
0 | No firewall (default setting). |
1 | Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80. |
2 | Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
3 | Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
10 | Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080. |
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.
Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.
Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.
This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.
In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.
In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.
The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).
Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.
LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.
The local_host setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the local_host setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.The local_host setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the local_host setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The local_host setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the local_host setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.The local_host setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.
In multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface), setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.
If the class is connected, the local_host setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multihomed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).
This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by local_port after the connection is established.
local_port cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
The port in the local host where the class binds.This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by local_port after the connection is established.
local_port cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by local_port after the connection is established.
local_port cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
The port in the local host where the class binds.This configuration setting must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.
Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by local_port after the connection is established.
local_port cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.
This configuration setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port on the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.
MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an eol string.
If an eol string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no eol is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an eol string.
If an eol string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no eol is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an eol string.
If an eol string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no eol is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an eol string.
If an eol string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.
If no eol is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the on_data_in event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.
The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.
This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:
www.google.com;www.example.com
If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.
Note: This value is not applicable in Java.
When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
Whether or not to delay when sending packets.When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
Whether or not to delay when sending packets.When set to True, the socket will send all data that are ready to send at once. When set to False, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.
By default, this configuration setting is set to False.
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are as follows:
0 | IPv4 only |
1 | IPv6 only |
2 | IPv6 with IPv4 fallback |
SSL Config Settings
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the on_ssl_status event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if ssl_provider is set to Platform.
Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the on_ssl_status event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if ssl_provider is set to Platform.
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the on_ssl_status event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if ssl_provider is set to Platform.
Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting controls whether Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) packets should be logged. By default, this configuration setting is False, as it is useful only for debugging purposes.
When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the on_ssl_status event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.
Enabling this configuration setting has no effect if ssl_provider is set to Platform.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
The path to a directory containing CA certificates.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
The path to a directory containing CA certificates.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g., 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1). OpenSSL recommends the use of the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by the following sequences:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
Before, between, and after the certificate text is allowed, which can be used, for example, for descriptions of the certificates. Refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.
By default, OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG, and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
If set to True, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:
- The target host name is the same.
- The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
- The application process that calls the function is the same.
- The logon session is the same.
- The instance of the class is the same.
This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.This configuration setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found, the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.
The default value is as follows:
/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the ssl_cert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake.
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the ssl_cert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the ssl_cert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to be included when performing an SSL handshake.
When ssl_provider is set to Internal, this configuration setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included with the ssl_cert property. Some servers or clients require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL authentication. The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting specifies whether the class will check the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) specified by the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the list of CRL URLs from the server certificate's CRL distribution points extension. The class will then make HTTP requests to each CRL endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the CRL check will not be performed by the class. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the CRL check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support CRL. When set to 2, it will perform the CRL check and will throw an error if CRL is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
Whether to check the Certificate Revocation List for the server certificate.This configuration setting specifies whether the class will check the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) specified by the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the list of CRL URLs from the server certificate's CRL distribution points extension. The class will then make HTTP requests to each CRL endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the CRL check will not be performed by the class. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the CRL check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support CRL. When set to 2, it will perform the CRL check and will throw an error if CRL is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
This configuration setting specifies whether the class will check the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) specified by the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the list of CRL URLs from the server certificate's CRL distribution points extension. The class will then make HTTP requests to each CRL endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the CRL check will not be performed by the class. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the CRL check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support CRL. When set to 2, it will perform the CRL check and will throw an error if CRL is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
Whether to check the Certificate Revocation List for the server certificate.This configuration setting specifies whether the class will check the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) specified by the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the list of CRL URLs from the server certificate's CRL distribution points extension. The class will then make HTTP requests to each CRL endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the CRL check will not be performed by the class. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the CRL check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support CRL. When set to 2, it will perform the CRL check and will throw an error if CRL is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
This configuration setting specifies whether the class will use OCSP to check the validity of the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) URL from the server certificate's OCSP extension. The class will then locate the issuing certificate and make an HTTP request to the OCSP endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation, the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the class will not perform an OCSP check. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the OCSP check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support OCSP. When set to 2, it will perform the OCSP check and will throw an error if OCSP is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
Whether to use OCSP to check the status of the server certificate.This configuration setting specifies whether the class will use OCSP to check the validity of the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) URL from the server certificate's OCSP extension. The class will then locate the issuing certificate and make an HTTP request to the OCSP endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation, the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the class will not perform an OCSP check. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the OCSP check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support OCSP. When set to 2, it will perform the OCSP check and will throw an error if OCSP is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
This configuration setting specifies whether the class will use OCSP to check the validity of the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) URL from the server certificate's OCSP extension. The class will then locate the issuing certificate and make an HTTP request to the OCSP endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation, the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the class will not perform an OCSP check. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the OCSP check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support OCSP. When set to 2, it will perform the OCSP check and will throw an error if OCSP is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
Whether to use OCSP to check the status of the server certificate.This configuration setting specifies whether the class will use OCSP to check the validity of the server certificate. If set to 1 or 2, the class will first obtain the Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) URL from the server certificate's OCSP extension. The class will then locate the issuing certificate and make an HTTP request to the OCSP endpoint to check the validity of the server's certificate. If the certificate has been revoked or any other issues are found during validation, the class fails with an error.
When set to 0 (default), the class will not perform an OCSP check. When set to 1, it will attempt to perform the OCSP check, but it will continue without an error if the server's certificate does not support OCSP. When set to 2, it will perform the OCSP check and will throw an error if OCSP is not supported.
This configuration setting is supported only in the Java, C#, and C++ editions. In the C++ edition, it is supported only on Windows operating systems.
This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the on_ssl_status event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the on_ssl_status event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the on_ssl_status event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.This minimum cipher strength is largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.
Note: This configuration setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the on_ssl_status event.
Use this configuration setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.
When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList configuration setting.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when ssl_authenticate_clients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when ssl_authenticate_clients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when ssl_authenticate_clients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL client certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only applicable to server components (e.g., TCPServer) see SSLServerCACerts for client components (e.g., TCPClient). This setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the client certificate that is presented by the client during the SSL handshake when ssl_authenticate_clients is enabled. When verifying the client's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the client's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the client's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert ... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert ... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.This configuration setting enables the cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.
By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").
The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.
Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.
Example values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Platform include the following:
- CALG_3DES
- CALG_3DES_112
- CALG_AES
- CALG_AES_128
- CALG_AES_192
- CALG_AES_256
- CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
- CALG_CYLINK_MEK
- CALG_DES
- CALG_DESX
- CALG_DH_EPHEM
- CALG_DH_SF
- CALG_DSS_SIGN
- CALG_ECDH
- CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
- CALG_ECDSA
- CALG_ECMQV
- CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
- CALG_HUGHES_MD5
- CALG_HMAC
- CALG_KEA_KEYX
- CALG_MAC
- CALG_MD2
- CALG_MD4
- CALG_MD5
- CALG_NO_SIGN
- CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
- CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
- CALG_PCT1_MASTER
- CALG_RC2
- CALG_RC4
- CALG_RC5
- CALG_RSA_KEYX
- CALG_RSA_SIGN
- CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
- CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
- CALG_SEAL
- CALG_SHA
- CALG_SHA1
- CALG_SHA_256
- CALG_SHA_384
- CALG_SHA_512
- CALG_SKIPJACK
- CALG_SSL2_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_MASTER
- CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
- CALG_TEK
- CALG_TLS1_MASTER
- CALG_TLS1PRF
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA");
Possible values when ssl_provider is set to Internal include the following:
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
- TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols), only the following cipher suites are supported:
- TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
- TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
- TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.
This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the ssl_provider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, ssl_provider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the ssl_provider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and ssl_provider needs to be set to platform.
Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the ssl_provider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, ssl_provider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the ssl_provider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and ssl_provider needs to be set to platform.
This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the ssl_provider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, ssl_provider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the ssl_provider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and ssl_provider needs to be set to platform.
Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.This configuration setting is used to enable or disable the supported security protocols.
Not all supported protocols are enabled by default. The default value is 4032 for client components, and 3072 for server components. To specify a combination of enabled protocol versions set this config to the binary OR of one or more of the following values:
TLS1.3 | 12288 (Hex 3000) |
TLS1.2 | 3072 (Hex C00) (Default - Client and Server) |
TLS1.1 | 768 (Hex 300) (Default - Client) |
TLS1 | 192 (Hex C0) (Default - Client) |
SSL3 | 48 (Hex 30) |
SSL2 | 12 (Hex 0C) |
Note that only TLS 1.2 is enabled for server components that accept incoming connections. This adheres to industry standards to ensure a secure connection. Client components enable TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, and TLS 1.2 by default and will negotiate the highest mutually supported version when connecting to a server, which should be TLS 1.2 in most cases.
SSLEnabledProtocols: Transport Layer Security (TLS) 1.3 Notes:
By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled, the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the ssl_provider is set to Automatic for all editions.
In editions that are designed to run on Windows, ssl_provider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is supported only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.
If set to 1 (Platform provider), please be aware of the following notes:
- The platform provider is available only on Windows 11/Windows Server 2022 and up.
- SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
- If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2, these restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.
SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:
SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the ssl_provider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and ssl_provider needs to be set to platform.
This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is False by default, but it can be set to True to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is False by default, but it can be set to True to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is False by default, but it can be set to True to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.This configuration setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This configuration setting is False by default, but it can be set to True to enable the extension.
This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.This configuration setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event.
If set to True, all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the on_ssl_server_authentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.
This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.This configuration setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.
When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools, such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffic for debugging purposes. When writing to this file, the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.
Note: This configuration setting is applicable only when ssl_provider is set to Internal.
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
Returns the negotiated cipher suite.This configuration setting returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.This configuration setting returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.This configuration setting returns the strength of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
Returns the negotiated protocol version.This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
Returns the negotiated protocol version.This configuration setting returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.
Note: For server components (e.g., TCPServer), this is a per-connection configuration setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example:
server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");
The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
Flags that control certificate verification.The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
Flags that control certificate verification.The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be ORed together to exclude multiple conditions:
0x00000001 | Ignore time validity status of certificate. |
0x00000002 | Ignore time validity status of CTL. |
0x00000004 | Ignore non-nested certificate times. |
0x00000010 | Allow unknown certificate authority. |
0x00000020 | Ignore wrong certificate usage. |
0x00000100 | Ignore unknown certificate revocation status. |
0x00000200 | Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status. |
0x00000400 | Ignore unknown certificate authority revocation status. |
0x00000800 | Ignore unknown root revocation status. |
0x00008000 | Allow test root certificate. |
0x00004000 | Trust test root certificate. |
0x80000000 | Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN non-matching server name). |
This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----A newline separated list of CA certificates to use during SSL server certificate validation.
This configuration setting is only used by client components (e.g., TCPClient) see SSLClientCACerts for server components (e.g., TCPServer). This configuration setting can be used to optionally specify one or more CA certificates to be used when connecting to the server and verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate, the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This configuration setting should be set only if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.
The value of this configuration setting is a newline-separated (CR/LF) list of certificates. For instance:
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw ... Intermediate Cert... eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj -----END CERTIFICATE----- \r \n -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE----- MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp ... Root Cert... d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA -----END CERTIFICATE-----
This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when ssl_provider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when ssl_provider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when ssl_provider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.This configuration setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when ssl_provider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.
When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this configuration setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported, the class fails with an error.
The format of this value is a comma-separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance:
component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal;
component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2
component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa");
The default value for this configuration setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.
To not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this configuration setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and ssl_provider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and ssl_provider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and ssl_provider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.
The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.
When using TLS 1.2 and ssl_provider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional roundtrip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.
The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result, only some groups are included by default in this configuration setting.
Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used that is not present in this list, it will incur an additional roundtrip and time to generate the key share for that group.
In most cases, this configuration setting does not need to be modified. This should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448"
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1"
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096"
- "ffdhe_6144"
- "ffdhe_8192"
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting holds a comma-separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values include the following:
- "ed25519" (default)
- "ed448" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
- "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
- "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
This configuration setting specifies a comma-separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This configuration setting should be modified only if there is a specific reason to do so.
The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192
The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:
- "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
- "ecdhe_x448" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
- "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
- "ffdhe_2048" (default)
- "ffdhe_3072" (default)
- "ffdhe_4096" (default)
- "ffdhe_6144" (default)
- "ffdhe_8192" (default)
Socket Config Settings
If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method that does not complete within timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.
Note: This option is not valid for User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes).
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.
When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g., headers for custom authentication schemes).
This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. In some cases, increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. In some cases, increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance.
Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.
Base Config Settings
When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the product's build.
The default code page is Unicode UTF-8 (65001).
The following is a list of valid code page identifiers:
Identifier | Name |
037 | IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada |
437 | OEM - United States |
500 | IBM EBCDIC - International |
708 | Arabic - ASMO 708 |
709 | Arabic - ASMO 449+, BCON V4 |
710 | Arabic - Transparent Arabic |
720 | Arabic - Transparent ASMO |
737 | OEM - Greek (formerly 437G) |
775 | OEM - Baltic |
850 | OEM - Multilingual Latin I |
852 | OEM - Latin II |
855 | OEM - Cyrillic (primarily Russian) |
857 | OEM - Turkish |
858 | OEM - Multilingual Latin I + Euro symbol |
860 | OEM - Portuguese |
861 | OEM - Icelandic |
862 | OEM - Hebrew |
863 | OEM - Canadian-French |
864 | OEM - Arabic |
865 | OEM - Nordic |
866 | OEM - Russian |
869 | OEM - Modern Greek |
870 | IBM EBCDIC - Multilingual/ROECE (Latin-2) |
874 | ANSI/OEM - Thai (same as 28605, ISO 8859-15) |
875 | IBM EBCDIC - Modern Greek |
932 | ANSI/OEM - Japanese, Shift-JIS |
936 | ANSI/OEM - Simplified Chinese (PRC, Singapore) |
949 | ANSI/OEM - Korean (Unified Hangul Code) |
950 | ANSI/OEM - Traditional Chinese (Taiwan; Hong Kong SAR, PRC) |
1026 | IBM EBCDIC - Turkish (Latin-5) |
1047 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin 1/Open System |
1140 | IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada (037 + Euro symbol) |
1141 | IBM EBCDIC - Germany (20273 + Euro symbol) |
1142 | IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway (20277 + Euro symbol) |
1143 | IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden (20278 + Euro symbol) |
1144 | IBM EBCDIC - Italy (20280 + Euro symbol) |
1145 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain (20284 + Euro symbol) |
1146 | IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom (20285 + Euro symbol) |
1147 | IBM EBCDIC - France (20297 + Euro symbol) |
1148 | IBM EBCDIC - International (500 + Euro symbol) |
1149 | IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic (20871 + Euro symbol) |
1200 | Unicode UCS-2 Little-Endian (BMP of ISO 10646) |
1201 | Unicode UCS-2 Big-Endian |
1250 | ANSI - Central European |
1251 | ANSI - Cyrillic |
1252 | ANSI - Latin I |
1253 | ANSI - Greek |
1254 | ANSI - Turkish |
1255 | ANSI - Hebrew |
1256 | ANSI - Arabic |
1257 | ANSI - Baltic |
1258 | ANSI/OEM - Vietnamese |
1361 | Korean (Johab) |
10000 | MAC - Roman |
10001 | MAC - Japanese |
10002 | MAC - Traditional Chinese (Big5) |
10003 | MAC - Korean |
10004 | MAC - Arabic |
10005 | MAC - Hebrew |
10006 | MAC - Greek I |
10007 | MAC - Cyrillic |
10008 | MAC - Simplified Chinese (GB 2312) |
10010 | MAC - Romania |
10017 | MAC - Ukraine |
10021 | MAC - Thai |
10029 | MAC - Latin II |
10079 | MAC - Icelandic |
10081 | MAC - Turkish |
10082 | MAC - Croatia |
12000 | Unicode UCS-4 Little-Endian |
12001 | Unicode UCS-4 Big-Endian |
20000 | CNS - Taiwan |
20001 | TCA - Taiwan |
20002 | Eten - Taiwan |
20003 | IBM5550 - Taiwan |
20004 | TeleText - Taiwan |
20005 | Wang - Taiwan |
20105 | IA5 IRV International Alphabet No. 5 (7-bit) |
20106 | IA5 German (7-bit) |
20107 | IA5 Swedish (7-bit) |
20108 | IA5 Norwegian (7-bit) |
20127 | US-ASCII (7-bit) |
20261 | T.61 |
20269 | ISO 6937 Non-Spacing Accent |
20273 | IBM EBCDIC - Germany |
20277 | IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway |
20278 | IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden |
20280 | IBM EBCDIC - Italy |
20284 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain |
20285 | IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom |
20290 | IBM EBCDIC - Japanese Katakana Extended |
20297 | IBM EBCDIC - France |
20420 | IBM EBCDIC - Arabic |
20423 | IBM EBCDIC - Greek |
20424 | IBM EBCDIC - Hebrew |
20833 | IBM EBCDIC - Korean Extended |
20838 | IBM EBCDIC - Thai |
20866 | Russian - KOI8-R |
20871 | IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic |
20880 | IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Russian) |
20905 | IBM EBCDIC - Turkish |
20924 | IBM EBCDIC - Latin-1/Open System (1047 + Euro symbol) |
20932 | JIS X 0208-1990 & 0121-1990 |
20936 | Simplified Chinese (GB2312) |
21025 | IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Serbian, Bulgarian) |
21027 | Extended Alpha Lowercase |
21866 | Ukrainian (KOI8-U) |
28591 | ISO 8859-1 Latin I |
28592 | ISO 8859-2 Central Europe |
28593 | ISO 8859-3 Latin 3 |
28594 | ISO 8859-4 Baltic |
28595 | ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic |
28596 | ISO 8859-6 Arabic |
28597 | ISO 8859-7 Greek |
28598 | ISO 8859-8 Hebrew |
28599 | ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 |
28605 | ISO 8859-15 Latin 9 |
29001 | Europa 3 |
38598 | ISO 8859-8 Hebrew |
50220 | ISO 2022 Japanese with no halfwidth Katakana |
50221 | ISO 2022 Japanese with halfwidth Katakana |
50222 | ISO 2022 Japanese JIS X 0201-1989 |
50225 | ISO 2022 Korean |
50227 | ISO 2022 Simplified Chinese |
50229 | ISO 2022 Traditional Chinese |
50930 | Japanese (Katakana) Extended |
50931 | US/Canada and Japanese |
50933 | Korean Extended and Korean |
50935 | Simplified Chinese Extended and Simplified Chinese |
50936 | Simplified Chinese |
50937 | US/Canada and Traditional Chinese |
50939 | Japanese (Latin) Extended and Japanese |
51932 | EUC - Japanese |
51936 | EUC - Simplified Chinese |
51949 | EUC - Korean |
51950 | EUC - Traditional Chinese |
52936 | HZ-GB2312 Simplified Chinese |
54936 | Windows XP: GB18030 Simplified Chinese (4 Byte) |
57002 | ISCII Devanagari |
57003 | ISCII Bengali |
57004 | ISCII Tamil |
57005 | ISCII Telugu |
57006 | ISCII Assamese |
57007 | ISCII Oriya |
57008 | ISCII Kannada |
57009 | ISCII Malayalam |
57010 | ISCII Gujarati |
57011 | ISCII Punjabi |
65000 | Unicode UTF-7 |
65001 | Unicode UTF-8 |
Identifier | Name |
1 | ASCII |
2 | NEXTSTEP |
3 | JapaneseEUC |
4 | UTF8 |
5 | ISOLatin1 |
6 | Symbol |
7 | NonLossyASCII |
8 | ShiftJIS |
9 | ISOLatin2 |
10 | Unicode |
11 | WindowsCP1251 |
12 | WindowsCP1252 |
13 | WindowsCP1253 |
14 | WindowsCP1254 |
15 | WindowsCP1250 |
21 | ISO2022JP |
30 | MacOSRoman |
10 | UTF16String |
0x90000100 | UTF16BigEndian |
0x94000100 | UTF16LittleEndian |
0x8c000100 | UTF32String |
0x98000100 | UTF32BigEndian |
0x9c000100 | UTF32LittleEndian |
65536 | Proprietary |
When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the license this instance of a class is using. It will return the following information:
- Product: The product the license is for.
- Product Key: The key the license was generated from.
- License Source: Where the license was found (e.g., RuntimeLicense, License File).
- License Type: The type of license installed (e.g., Royalty Free, Single Server).
- Last Valid Build: The last valid build number for which the license will work.
In certain circumstances it may be beneficial to mask sensitive data, like passwords, in log messages. Set this to True to mask sensitive data. The default is True.
This setting only works on these classes: AS3Receiver, AS3Sender, Atom, Client(3DS), FTP, FTPServer, IMAP, OFTPClient, SSHClient, SCP, Server(3DS), Sexec, SFTP, SFTPServer, SSHServer, TCPClient, TCPServer.
If set to False, the class will not fire internal idle events. Set this to False to use the class in a background thread on Mac OS. By default, this setting is True.
If there are no events to process when do_events is called, the class will wait for the amount of time specified here before returning. The default value is 20.
When set to False, the class will use the system security libraries by default to perform cryptographic functions where applicable.
Setting this configuration setting to True tells the class to use the internal implementation instead of using the system security libraries.
On Windows, this setting is set to False by default. On Linux/macOS, this setting is set to True by default.
To use the system security libraries for Linux, OpenSSL support must be enabled. For more information on how to enable OpenSSL, please refer to the OpenSSL Notes section.
FDMSRcDebit Errors
FDMSDebit Errors
432 | Invalid index. |
501 | Invalid length for this property. |
502 | Invalid data format for this property. |
503 | Value is out of range. |
504 | Credit card digit check failed. |
505 | Card date invalid. |
506 | Card expired. |
519 | Corrupt response. |
520 | Response payload empty. |
521 | Response truncated. |
526 | Invalid timeout value. |
593 | A property required for this transaction is missing. |
529 | Error in XML response. |
530 | Status code received in response indicates an error condition. |
531 | Return code received in response indicates an error condition. |
532 | Cannot generate detail aggregate - this transaction was not successfully authorized. |
533 | Internal error constructing payload. |
The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.
HTTP Errors
118 | Firewall error. The error description contains the detailed message. |
143 | Busy executing current method. |
151 | HTTP protocol error. The error message has the server response. |
152 | No server specified in url. |
153 | Specified url_scheme is invalid. |
155 | Range operation is not supported by server. |
156 | Invalid cookie index (out of range). |
301 | Interrupted. |
302 | Cannot open attached_file. |
The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.
TCPClient Errors
100 | You cannot change the remote_port at this time. A connection is in progress. |
101 | You cannot change the remote_host (Server) at this time. A connection is in progress. |
102 | The remote_host address is invalid (0.0.0.0). |
104 | Already connected. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first. |
106 | You cannot change the local_port at this time. A connection is in progress. |
107 | You cannot change the local_host at this time. A connection is in progress. |
112 | You cannot change MaxLineLength at this time. A connection is in progress. |
116 | remote_port cannot be zero. Please specify a valid service port number. |
117 | You cannot change the UseConnection option while the class is active. |
135 | Operation would block. |
201 | Timeout. |
211 | Action impossible in control's present state. |
212 | Action impossible while not connected. |
213 | Action impossible while listening. |
301 | Timeout. |
302 | Could not open file. |
434 | Unable to convert string to selected CodePage. |
1105 | Already connecting. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first. |
1117 | You need to connect first. |
1119 | You cannot change the LocalHost at this time. A connection is in progress. |
1120 | Connection dropped by remote host. |
SSL Errors
270 | Cannot load specified security library. |
271 | Cannot open certificate store. |
272 | Cannot find specified certificate. |
273 | Cannot acquire security credentials. |
274 | Cannot find certificate chain. |
275 | Cannot verify certificate chain. |
276 | Error during handshake. |
280 | Error verifying certificate. |
281 | Could not find client certificate. |
282 | Could not find server certificate. |
283 | Error encrypting data. |
284 | Error decrypting data. |
TCP/IP Errors
10004 | [10004] Interrupted system call. |
10009 | [10009] Bad file number. |
10013 | [10013] Access denied. |
10014 | [10014] Bad address. |
10022 | [10022] Invalid argument. |
10024 | [10024] Too many open files. |
10035 | [10035] Operation would block. |
10036 | [10036] Operation now in progress. |
10037 | [10037] Operation already in progress. |
10038 | [10038] Socket operation on nonsocket. |
10039 | [10039] Destination address required. |
10040 | [10040] Message is too long. |
10041 | [10041] Protocol wrong type for socket. |
10042 | [10042] Bad protocol option. |
10043 | [10043] Protocol is not supported. |
10044 | [10044] Socket type is not supported. |
10045 | [10045] Operation is not supported on socket. |
10046 | [10046] Protocol family is not supported. |
10047 | [10047] Address family is not supported by protocol family. |
10048 | [10048] Address already in use. |
10049 | [10049] Cannot assign requested address. |
10050 | [10050] Network is down. |
10051 | [10051] Network is unreachable. |
10052 | [10052] Net dropped connection or reset. |
10053 | [10053] Software caused connection abort. |
10054 | [10054] Connection reset by peer. |
10055 | [10055] No buffer space available. |
10056 | [10056] Socket is already connected. |
10057 | [10057] Socket is not connected. |
10058 | [10058] Cannot send after socket shutdown. |
10059 | [10059] Too many references, cannot splice. |
10060 | [10060] Connection timed out. |
10061 | [10061] Connection refused. |
10062 | [10062] Too many levels of symbolic links. |
10063 | [10063] File name is too long. |
10064 | [10064] Host is down. |
10065 | [10065] No route to host. |
10066 | [10066] Directory is not empty |
10067 | [10067] Too many processes. |
10068 | [10068] Too many users. |
10069 | [10069] Disc Quota Exceeded. |
10070 | [10070] Stale NFS file handle. |
10071 | [10071] Too many levels of remote in path. |
10091 | [10091] Network subsystem is unavailable. |
10092 | [10092] WINSOCK DLL Version out of range. |
10093 | [10093] Winsock is not loaded yet. |
11001 | [11001] Host not found. |
11002 | [11002] Nonauthoritative 'Host not found' (try again or check DNS setup). |
11003 | [11003] Nonrecoverable errors: FORMERR, REFUSED, NOTIMP. |
11004 | [11004] Valid name, no data record (check DNS setup). |